OWNER’S MANUAL
Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled: “USING THE UNIT SAFELY”
and “IMPORTANT NOTES” (p. 3; p. 5). These sections provide important information
concerning the proper operation of the unit. Additionally, in order to feel assured that
you have gained a good grasp of every feature provided by your new unit, OWNER’S
MANUAL should be read in its entirety. The manual should be saved and kept on hand as
a convenient reference.
* CompactFlash and
are trademarks of SanDisk Corporation and licensed by CompactFlash association.
* Roland Corporation is an authorized licensee of the CompactFlash™ and CF logo (
) trademarks.
* MMP (Moore Microprocessor Portfolio) refers to a patent portfolio concerned with microprocessor architecture,
which was developed by Technology Properties Limited (TPL). Roland has licensed this technology from the
TPL Group.
Copyright © 2006 ROLAND CORPORATION
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without the written permission of
ROLAND CORPORATION.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USING THE UNIT SAFELY
The
symbol alerts the user to important instructions
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of death or severe
injury should the unit be used
improperly.
or warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is
determined by the design contained within the
triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for
general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of injury or material
damage should the unit be used
improperly.
The
symbol alerts the user to items that must never
be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that
must not be done is indicated by the design contained
within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it
means that the unit must never be disassembled.
* Material damage refers to damage or
other adverse effects caused with
respect to the home and all its
furnishings, as well to domestic
animals or pets.
The ● symbol alerts the user to things that must be
carried out. The specific thing that must be done is
indicated by the design contained within the circle. In
the case of the symbol at left, it means that the power-
cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet.
•
001 Before using this unit, make sure to read the
•
006 When using the unit with a rack or stand recom-
mended by Roland, the rack or stand must be
carefully placed so it is level and sure to remain
stable. If not using a rack or stand, you still need
to make sure that any location you choose for
placing the unit provides a level surface that will
properly support the unit, and keep it from
wobbling.
instructions below, and the Owner’s Manual.
..........................................................................................................
002b
•
Do not open or perform any internal modifica-
tions on the unit. (The only exception would be
where this manual provides specific instructions
which should be followed in order to put in place
user-installable options; see p. 15.)
..........................................................................................................
008a
•
..........................................................................................................
The unit should be connected to a power supply
only of the type described in the operating
instructions, or as marked on the side of unit.
•
003 Do not attempt to repair the unit, or replace parts
within it (except when this manual provides
specific instructions directing you to do so). Refer
all servicing to your retailer, the nearest Roland Service
Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as listed on
the “Information” page.
..........................................................................................................
008e
•
Use only the attached power-supply cord. Also,
the supplied power cord must not be used with
any other device.
..........................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................
004 Never use or store the unit in places that are:
•
009 Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord,
•
• Subject to temperature extremes (e.g., direct
sunlight in an enclosed vehicle, near a heating
duct, on top of heat-generating equipment); or
are
nor place heavy objects on it. Doing so can
damage the cord, producing severed elements
and short circuits. Damaged cords are fire and
shock hazards!
..........................................................................................................
• Damp (e.g., baths, washrooms, on wet floors);
or are
•
010 This unit, either alone or in combination with an
• Humid; or are
amplifier and headphones or speakers, may be
capable of producing sound levels that could
cause permanent hearing loss. Do not operate for
a long period of time at a high volume level, or at
a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience
any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should
immediately stop using the unit, and consult an
audiologist.
• Exposed to rain; or are
• Dusty; or are
• Subject to high levels of vibration.
..........................................................................................................
005 This unit should be used only with a rack or stand
•
that is recommended by Roland.
..........................................................................................................
011 Do not allow any objects (e.g., flammable
..........................................................................................................
•
material, coins, pins); or liquids of any kind
(water, soft drinks, etc.) to penetrate the unit.
..........................................................................................................
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
012a
101a
•
Immediately turn the power off, remove the
•
The unit should be located so that its location or
power cord from the outlet, and request servicing
by your retailer, the nearest Roland Service
Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as
listed on the “Information” page when:
position does not interfere with its proper venti-
lation.
..........................................................................................................
102b
•
Always grasp only the plug on the power-supply
cord when plugging into, or unplugging from, an
outlet or this unit.
• The power-supply cord, or the plug has been
damaged; or
• If smoke or unusual odor occurs
..........................................................................................................
103a
• Objects have fallen into, or liquid has been
spilled onto the unit; or
•
At regular intervals, you should unplug the
power plug and clean it by using a dry cloth to
wipe all dust and other accumulations away from
its prongs. Also, disconnect the power plug from
the power outlet whenever the unit is to remain
unused for an extended period of time. Any
accumulation of dust between the power plug
and the power outlet can result in poor insulation
and lead to fire.
• The unit has been exposed to rain (or otherwise
has become wet); or
• The unit does not appear to operate normally
or exhibits a marked change in performance.
..........................................................................................................
013 In households with small children, an adult
•
should provide supervision until the child is
capable of following all the rules essential for the
safe operation of the unit.
..........................................................................................................
•
104 Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming
entangled. Also, all cords and cables should be
placed so they are out of the reach of children.
..........................................................................................................
014 Protect the unit from strong impact.
•
..........................................................................................................
•
106 Never climb on top of, nor place heavy objects on
(Do not drop it!)
..........................................................................................................
015 Do not force the unit’s power-supply cord to
the unit.
•
..........................................................................................................
107b
share an outlet with an unreasonable number of
other devices. Be especially careful when using
extension cords—the total power used by all
devices you have connected to the extension
cord’s outlet must never exceed the power rating
(watts/amperes) for the extension cord. Excessive
loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat
up and eventually melt through.
•
Never handle the power cord or its plugs with
wet hands when plugging into, or unplugging
from, an outlet or this unit.
..........................................................................................................
108a
•
Before moving the unit, disconnect the power
plug from the outlet, and pull out all cords from
external devices.
..........................................................................................................
016 Before using the unit in a foreign country, consult
..........................................................................................................
109a
•
•
Before cleaning the unit, turn off the power and
unplug the power cord from the outlet (p. 15).
with your retailer, the nearest Roland Service
Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as
listed on the “Information” page.
110a
..........................................................................................................
•
Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning
in your area, pull the plug on the power cord out
of the outlet.
022a
•
Always turn the unit off and unplug the power
cord before attempting installation of the circuit
board (AR-NT1/AR-NT1R).
..........................................................................................................
115a
..........................................................................................................
026 Do not put anything that contains water (e.g.,
•
Install only the specified circuit board(s) (AR-
NT1/AR-NT1R). Remove only the specified
screws (p. 15).
•
flower vases) on this unit. Also, avoid the use of
insecticides, perfumes, alcohol, nail polish, spray
cans, etc., near the unit. Swiftly wipe away any
liquid that spills on the unit using a dry, soft
cloth.
..........................................................................................................
118b
•
Keep the included Rubber Feet in a safe place out
of children’s reach, so there is no chance of them
being swallowed accidentally.
..........................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................
•
118cKeep any screws you may remove and the
included screws in a safe place out of children’s
reach, so there is no chance of them being
swallowed accidentally.
..........................................................................................................
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPORTANT NOTES
Power Supply
• Do not connect this unit to same electrical outlet that is
Maintenance
• For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a soft, dry cloth
301
401a
being used by an electrical appliance that is controlled by
an inverter (such as a refrigerator, washing machine,
microwave oven, or air conditioner), or that contains a
motor. Depending on the way in which the electrical
appliance is used, power supply noise may cause this unit
to malfunction or may produce audible noise. If it is not
practical to use a separate electrical outlet, connect a
power supply noise filter between this unit and the
electrical outlet.
or one that has been slightly dampened with water. To
remove stubborn dirt, use a cloth impregnated with a
mild, non-abrasive detergent. Afterwards, be sure to wipe
the unit thoroughly with a soft, dry cloth.
402
• Never use benzine, thinners, alcohol or solvents of any
kind, to avoid the possibility of discoloration and/or
deformation.
307
Additional Precautions
• Unfortunately, it may be impossible to restore the contents
• Before connecting this unit to other devices, turn off the
552
power to all units. This will help prevent malfunctions
and/or damage to speakers or other devices.
of data that was stored on a memory card once it has been
lost. Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning
such loss of data.
308
• Although the LCD and LEDs are switched off when the
POWER switch is switched off, this does not mean that the
unit has been completely disconnected from the source of
power. If you need to turn off the power completely, first
turn off the POWER switch, then unplug the power cord
from the power outlet. For this reason, the outlet into
which you choose to connect the power cord’s plug
should be one that is within easy reach and readily acces-
sible.
553
• Use a reasonable amount of care when using the unit’s
buttons, sliders, or other controls; and when using its jacks
and connectors. Rough handling can lead to malfunctions.
554
• Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display.
556
• When connecting / disconnecting all cables, grasp the
connector itself—never pull on the cable. This way you
will avoid causing shorts, or damage to the cable’s
internal elements.
Placement
• Using the unit near power amplifiers (or other equipment
351
557
• A small amount of heat will radiate from the unit during
containing large power transformers) may induce hum.
To alleviate the problem, change the orientation of this
unit; or move it farther away from the source of inter-
ference.
normal operation.
558a
• To avoid disturbing your neighbors, try to keep the unit’s
volume at reasonable levels. You may prefer to use
headphones, so you do not need to be concerned about
those around you (especially when it is late at night).
352a
• This device may interfere with radio and television
reception. Do not use this device in the vicinity of such
receivers.
559a
• When you need to transport the unit, package it in the box
(including padding) that it came in, if possible. Otherwise,
you will need to use equivalent packaging materials.
352b
• Noise may be produced if wireless communications
devices, such as cell phones, are operated in the vicinity of
this unit. Such noise could occur when receiving or initi-
ating a call, or while conversing. Should you experience
such problems, you should relocate such wireless devices
so they are at a greater distance from this unit, or switch
them off.
562
• Use a cable from Roland to make the connection. If using
some other make of connection cable, please note the
following precautions.
• Some connection cables contain resistors. Do not use
cables that incorporate resistors for connecting to this
unit. The use of such cables can cause the sound level
to be extremely low, or impossible to hear. For infor-
mation on cable specifications, contact the manufac-
turer of the cable.
355b
• When moved from one location to another where the
temperature and/or humidity is very different, water
droplets (condensation) may form inside the unit. Damage
or malfunction may result if you attempt to use the unit in
this condition. Therefore, before using the unit, you must
allow it to stand for several hours, until the condensation
has completely evaporated.
360
• Depending on the material and temperature of the surface
on which you place the unit, its rubber feet may discolor
or mar the surface.
You can place a piece of felt or cloth under the rubber feet
to prevent this from happening. If you do so, please make
sure that the unit will not slip or move accidentally.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPORTANT NOTES
Before Using Cards
Using DATA Cards
704
• Carefully insert the DATA card all the way in—until it is
firmly in place.
fig.M512-Insert
CompactFlash™
705
• Never touch the terminals of the DATA card. Also, avoid
getting the terminals dirty.
707
• This unit’s memory card slot accepts CompactFlash
memory cards. Microdrive storage media are not
compatible.
708
• Memory cards are constructed using precision compo-
nents; handle the cards carefully, paying particular note to
the following.
• To prevent damage to the cards from static electricity,
be sure to discharge any static electricity from your
own body before handling the cards.
• Do not touch or allow metal to come into contact with
the contact portion of the cards.
• Do not bend, drop, or subject cards to strong shock or
vibration.
• Do not keep cards in direct sunlight, in closed vehicles,
or other such locations (storage temperature: -25 to 85˚
C).
• Do not allow cards to become wet.
• Do not disassemble or modify the cards.
Copyright
851
• Unauthorized recording, distribution, sale, lending, public
performance, broadcasting, or the like, in whole or in part,
of a work (musical composition, video, broadcast, public
performance, or the like) whose copyright is held by a
third party is prohibited by law.
853
• Do not use this unit for purposes that could infringe on a
copyright held by a third party. We assume no responsi-
bility whatsoever with regard to any infringements of
third-party copyrights arising through your use of this
unit.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Panel Descriptions................................................................................12
Rear Panel.................................................................................................................................................. 14
Installation de la carte facultative (French language for Canadian Safety Standard).................... 16
Installation.............................................................................................17
Using the MIDI Connectors......................................................................................................... 20
AR-LINK ........................................................................................................................................ 22
Turning On the Power............................................................................................................................. 24
Recording Audio........................................................................................................................... 27
Types of Usable Cards............................................................................................................................. 30
Using Cards Formatted on the AR-3000R with Earlier Models............................................. 34
Viewing the Basic Screen......................................................................................................................... 35
Screen During Audio Phrase Playback...................................................................................... 35
Screen During MIDI Phrase Playback........................................................................................ 35
Screen During Pattern Phrase or Song Phrase Playback......................................................... 35
Viewing the 7-segment Display.................................................................................................. 36
Display-related Settings........................................................................................................................... 37
Adjusting the Contrast ................................................................................................................. 37
Making the Display Go Dark ...................................................................................................... 38
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording Audio...................................................................................40
Recording Units—Phrases........................................................................................................... 40
Connecting Equipment ................................................................................................................ 40
Enabling Recording Standby....................................................................................................... 41
Required Settings for Recording Audio Signals (Recording Settings).................................. 42
Important Note: About Setting Information Imported from a Card..................................... 50
Delay Time (00s 00f to 59s 29f).................................................................................................... 55
Fade (Fade In and Fade Out)....................................................................................................... 58
Phrase Name.................................................................................................................................. 60
Time-based Combinations (Song Phrases)................................................................................ 65
Deleting a Phrase (Phrase Delete)............................................................................................... 67
Copying a Phrase (Phrase Copy)................................................................................................ 68
Making a Card Usable on the AR-3000R (Card Format)......................................................... 76
Card Conversion Chart/Conversion Error Chart.................................................................... 80
Recording and Playing MIDI Data (MIDI Phrases)..............................82
What Are MIDI Phrases? ............................................................................................................. 82
Connecting Equipment ................................................................................................................ 82
Unit Settings................................................................................................................................... 82
Starting and Ending Recording................................................................................................... 83
Playback of MIDI Phrases............................................................................................................ 84
Playback Procedures..................................................................................................................... 84
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Is No-voltage/Make-contact?........................................................................................... 85
Types of Control Input Playback................................................................................................ 85
What Is Direct Playback?/Uses and Applications................................................................... 86
Operational Specifications of Binary Playback......................................................................... 93
To Specify Phrases With Binary Signals .................................................................................... 95
Phrase Number/Binary Signal Correspondence Table........................................................... 96
What is Binary Recording/Uses and Applications.................................................................. 98
Operational Specifications for Binary Recording..................................................................... 98
What Is MIDI Control?/What You Can Do with MIDI Control.......................................... 105
Playback of Phrases Using MIDI Signals............................................................................................ 105
Synchronizing Operation to an External MIDI Instrument – 2 (MMC and MTC) ....................... 112
What Is MTC?/Synchronized Playback with Video Equipment and Other Devices....... 112
Connecting External Equipment............................................................................................... 113
AR-3000R Settings (When the AR-3000R Is the Slave) .......................................................... 113
Operation Procedures................................................................................................................. 116
AR-3000R Settings (When the AR-3000R Is the Master) ....................................................... 116
Operation Procedures................................................................................................................. 117
MTC Offset Setting ..................................................................................................................... 118
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the AR Using the RS-232C Connector..........................119
Baud Rate Setting........................................................................................................................ 119
Available Documentation for the RS-232C.............................................................................. 119
What Is the Dual Mono Mode?/Equipment Connections.................................................... 120
Playback Procedure .................................................................................................................... 124
Handy Uses of Line Thru........................................................................................................... 125
Line Thru Settings....................................................................................................................... 125
Troubleshooting..................................................................................129
Error messages...................................................................................132
Card-specific Audio Recording Time Chart....................................................................................... 134
Settings When a Card Is Formatted..................................................................................................... 135
Recorded Phrase Data............................................................................................................................ 136
Terminals.............................................................................................137
Specifications of the Control Input/Output Terminals.................................................................... 137
RS-232C Connector Specifications ....................................................................................................... 137
MIDI Implementation...........................................................................139
Specification........................................................................................147
Input/Output Standard......................................................................................................................... 149
Dimensions.............................................................................................................................................. 149
Index.....................................................................................................150
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Main Features
High-quality Recording and Playback
Two-unit Playback with a Single Unit–
Dual Mono Mode
Thanks to Roland’s innovative RDAC system, you can enjoy
high-quality, 24-bit recording and playback at 48 kHz using
less data. You can select recording settings that suit the
situation and the capacity of the card (sampling frequency: 6
levels, recording mode: 5 levels). This ensures support for
recording and playback in a variety of situations and uses.
The Dual Mono mode lets you manipulate the left and right
channels independently, and play back mono audio phrases
individually. This means you can play back material for two
units on a single AR-3000R. You can also play back separate
phrases on the left and right channels either simultaneously,
or shifted.
What you record and the settings are all saved on the card, so
you can change situations rapidly simply by changing cards.
You can record and play back up to 2,000 phrases (when
using two cards).
Built-in 2-band Equalizer
The unit features an internal 2-band equalizer for audio-
phrase effects. This enables on-site correction of the sonic
field.
Audio Recording System with No
Moving Parts
A Variety of Control Jacks for a Wide
Range of Playback Methods
As connectors to use for control, the unit features a Control
In jack, MIDI connectors, an RS-232C port, and AR-LINK
connectors. This lets you select from a variety of playback
methods and create systems matched to usage and
situations.
An audio recording system that uses CF cardsnd has no
moving parts is employed. The system has no rotating parts
or drive mechanism, so it’s practically maintenance free. This
makes for outstanding durability with no loss of sound
quality.
Digital In Jack
In addition to a Line In jack (analog) and Mic jack, the unit
also features a Digital In jack. This means you can record
audio phrases of even higher sound quality by connecting
the unit to a digital-output device.
MIDI Connectors Allow for Play of
Musical Instruments and Syncing with
Video
Since the unit is equipped with MIDI connectors, you can
record and play back MIDI signals. You can play an
electronic musical instrument automatically, just like playing
back an audio phrase.
Large screen, Easy-to-understand
Messages, and EZ Setup Feature
Assure Simple Settings and Operation
The large display and easy-to-understand messages make it
Control of recording/playback using MIDI signals is also
supported. This means you can use MTC and MMC signals
to obtain recording/playback that is synchronized to video
and other external devices.
simple to make settings.
The unit also has a built-in EZ Setup feature that lets you
make settings interactively.
You’ll appreciate the impressive power this provides when
you’re using the AR-3000R for the first time, or when you
need to change the settings in a hurry during play.
Multi-track Operation–AR-LINK
Feature
The AR-LINK feature lets you link the unit to up to 32 other
A Full Array of Editing Features for
Modifying Phrases the Way You Want
units to create a completely synchronized multi-track system.
Conversion Feature for Using Data
from Legacy Models
Performing conversion with the Card Conversion feature
makes it possible for the AR-3000R to utilize cards used with
the earlier AR-2000/100 models, or to use cards created with
the AR-3000R on earlier models. This bidirectional data
exchange lets you make effective use of materials and data.
You can use the AR-3000R like a sampler to edit and modify
recorded material, including dividing, joining, and stretching
the time. Nondestructive editing is possible, so you can
modify the material without worrying about loss.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Panel Descriptions
Front Panel
fig.2-01e
9
5
7 8
1 2
4
6
10 12 13 14
11
16
15
3
17
1. Mic In Jack
7. PLAY Button and PLAY Indicator
This is for connecting a microphone during audio recording.
• Pressing the PLAY button plays back a phrase. When
playback is paused, pressing the PLAY or PAUSE button
restarts playback.
→ “Recording Audio” (p. 40)
2. INPUT VOLUME Knobs
• Holding down the STOP button and pressing the PLAY
button puts the unit in recording standby. Pressing the
PLAY or PAUSE button while in this state starts
recording.
the Line In jack.
The inner control adjusts the microphone-input volume level.
fig.2-02e
LINE Volume
(outer ring)
MIC Volume
(inner ring)
8. PAUSE/BACK Button and PAUSE Indicator
• Pressing the PAUSE button during playback of an audio
phrase pauses playback. Playback resumes when the
PLAY or PAUSE button is pressed again.
→“Recording Audio” (p. 40)
• Pressing the PLAY or PAUSE button while in the
recording-standby state starts recording.
The volume level of signals input to the Digital In jack cannot
be changed.
• When you are making settings, this button is used to
make the insertion point (highlighted) go back one step.
3. Card Access Indicator
This lights up when the unit reads or writes to a card.
When the CF card drive is in operation (that is, when the
access indicator is illuminated), do not try to take out the
card or turn off the power. Doing so may damage the card.
4. Card Slots
Do not insert any object other than a CF card (such as a wire,
coin, or different type of card) into the card slots. Doing so
may damage the unit.
5. Card Eject Buttons
6. Display
→“Viewing the Basic Screen” (p. 35)
962a
*
In the interest of product improvement, the specifications and/or appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior notice.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Panel Descriptions
fig.2-03e
12. ENTER Button
●About When the Indicators Light/Flash
13. SELECT Dial (Doubles As SELECT Button)
When Playing Back/Recording
This is used for such operations as selecting phrases and
choosing setting items.
PLAY button
State
PAUSE button
indicator
indicator
14. OUTPUT VOLUME Knob
During Playback Lights in green
Extinguished
During Pause
Flashes in green
(Playback)
This adjusts the volume level of the final output (at the audio
output jacks).
Flashes in green
During Recording
Flashes in red
Standby
Flashes in red
Extinguished
During Recording Lights in red
To prevent incorrect operation, you can disable this control
and set the volume at a fixed level.
→“Recording Audio” (p. 40)
→“Playback Using the Panel on the Unit
→ “Keeping the Output Volume Unchanged (Output Volume
Thru)” (p. 127)
(Manual Playback)” (p. 51)
15. Headphones Jack
When Sync Source is set to MTC
This is for connecting headphones for monitoring recording and
playback.
PLAY button
indicator
PAUSE button
State
indicator
During Pause
(Playback)
Lights in green
Lights in orange
The headphones volume level is adjusted with the OUTPUT
VOLUME control (the same as for the final volume [the audio
output jacks]).
During Recording
Standby
Lights in orange
Lights in red
When you activate the Volume Thru feature, you can use the
even when the OUTPUT VOLUME control has been deactivated.
→“Controlling the AR-3000R Using MIDI Signals
(MIDI Control)” (p. 105)
9. STOP Button
16. POWER Switch
• Pressing the STOP button stops phrase playback or
recording, extinguishing the PLAY indicator.
Turn the AR-3000R’s power on and off.
*
If you need to turn off the power completely, first turn off the
POWER switch, then unplug the power cord from the power
outlet. Refer to Power Supply (p. 5).
• Holding down the STOP button and pressing the PLAY
button puts the unit in recording standby.
10. EZ SETUP Button and EZ SETUP Indicator
17. Card Protector (Included)
This activates the EZ Setup feature, which lets you make settings
interactively.
This allows you to prevent the card being removed by mistake.
Use this feature if you’re using the AR-3000R for the first time, or
when you need to change the settings in a hurry during play.
The indicator lights up when EZ Setup is active.
→ “Easy Setup and Operation!–EZ Setup” (p. 25)
11. MODE Button and MODE Indicator
For entering the mode for making settings. The indicator lights
up while settings are made.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Panel Descriptions
Rear Panel
fig.2-04e
1
2
4
5 6
3
9
7
8
9
11
Top Panel
12
927
1. AC Inlet
5. Ground Terminal
This is for connecting the included AC power cord. Connect it
securely so that it doesn’t come loose.
Depending on the circumstances of a particular setup, you may
experience a discomforting sensation, or perceive that the
surface feels gritty to the touch when you touch this device,
microphones connected to it, or the metal portions of other
objects. This is due to an infinitesimal electrical charge, which is
absolutely harmless. However, if you are concerned about this,
connect the ground terminal (see figure) with an external
ground. When the unit is grounded, a slight hum may occur,
depending on the particulars of your installation. If you are
unsure of the connection method, contact the nearest Roland
Service Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as listed on
the “Information” page.
(Refer to p. 147 – for power requirements)
of the type maked on the side of unit.
2. AR-LINK Connectors (OUT and IN)
These are for connecting the AR units to each other when you’re
using more than one AR unit at the same time.
→ “Synchronized Recording and Playback with Multiple AR
Units (AR-LINK)” (p. 123)
Unsuitable places for connection
3. MIDI Connectors (OUT/THRU and IN)
• Water pipes (may result in shock or electrocution)
• Gas pipes (may result in fire or explosion)
These are used to make the connections when you operate the
AR with MIDI signals for recording MIDI phrases, performing
MIDI control, and so on.
• Telephone-line ground or lightning rod (may be dangerous in
the event of lightning)
•
MIDI IN: This receives MIDI information from another MIDI
instrument.
6. RS-232C Connector
This is used when connecting the AR-3000R to a computer or the
•
•
MIDI OUT: This sends MIDI information from the AR-3000R.
MIDI THRU: This sends, unchanged, MIDI information
received by MIDI IN.
On the AR-3000R, a single connector doubles in use for MIDI
OUT and MIDI THRU. When shipped from the factory, the
connector is set to “OUT.” You can change the function of the
connector as required.
7. Control Input/Output Terminals
These are used for connecting to external control devices.
Control Device
→ “Recording and Playing MIDI Data” (p. 82)
→“Controlling the AR with MIDI Signals (MIDI control)” (p.
105)
→“Controlling the AR-3000R from an External Device (Control
Input Terminals)” (p. 85)
• Controlling an External Device with Signals from the
AR-3000R
4. DIGITAL IN Jack (Coaxial, S/P DIF, EIAJ CP-
1201-compliant)
→ “Controlling Another Device with the AR-3000R(Control
Output Terminals)” (p. 102)
This is used when recording audio from a device equipped with
a digital audio-output jack.
*
In the interest of product improvement, the specifications and/or appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior notice.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Panel Descriptions
8. LINE IN Jack
Installing an Option Board
This is used when recording audio from a device equipped with
an analog audio-output jack.
9. Audio Output Jacks (BALANCED OUTPUT)
When installing, be sure refer to the owner’s manual for the
These are the final audio output jacks. They are used for
connection to a power amp or the like. Both balanced and
unbalanced connections are possible.
922
respective option board.
fig.2-06e
Top Panel
Removed screws
*
This instrument is equipped with balanced (TRS) type jacks.
Wiring diagrams for these jacks are shown below. Make
connections after first checking the wiring diagrams of other
equipment you intend to connect.
fig.2-05e
GND(SLEEVE)
GND(SLEEVE)
HOT(TIP)
HOT(TIP)
Option board
COLD(RING)
Balanced Output
Unbalanced Output
Rear Panel
926a
When connection cables with resistors are used, the volume
level of equipment connected to the inputs (LINE IN Jack)
may be low. If this happens, use connection cables that do
not contain resistors, such as those from the Roland PCS
series.
Important Notes on Installation
10. Option Board Slot
●
Before installing the board, switch off the power to the
equipment and unplug the power cord from the power outlet.
Remove only the specified screws.
This is the recess for installing an option board.
→ “Installing an Option board”
●
●
●
Be careful not to let removed screws fall into the unit.
After you have removed the panel, cover, and screws, do not
leave them off. When you have finished installing the option
board, be sure to reattach the panel, cover, and screws.
Be careful not to cut your hand on the opening for installing the
board.
When installing, be sure to refer to the owner’s manual for
the option board.
●
●
●
11. Option Board Space
This is where an option board is installed.
After installation, if the unit fails to power up when you switch
on the power, contact your Roland Service Station.
To avoid the risk of damage to internal components that can be
caused by static electricity, please carefully observe the
following whenever you handle the board.
→ “Installing an Option board”
901
When installing, be sure to refer to the owner’s manual for
the respective option board.
• Before you handle the circuit board, first touch the front panel
of the AR-3000R, and while maintaining contact with the front
panel, pick up the circuit board. This discharges any static
electricity that has accumulated in your body and clothing.
• When handling the board, grasp it only by the panel or the
board’s edges. Avoid touching any of the electronic
components or connectors.
12. Rubber Feet (Included Items)
→ “Attaching the Rubber Feet (Included Items)” (p. 17)
• When handling the board, grasp it only by the panel or
the board’s edges. Avoid touching any of the electronic
components or connectors.
• Before you connect any cables, make sure they do not
carry a static electricity charge. Such charges can be
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Panel Descriptions
●
Always turn the unit off and unplug the power cord before
attempting installation of the circuit board (model no. AR-NT1/
AR-NT1R).
transmitted, for example, if the other end of the cable
has been in contact with a carpet (or other object) where
there is a static electricity buildup.
914
●
●
Install only the specified circuit board(s) (model no. AR-NT1/
AR-NT1R). Remove only the specified screws.
When turning the unit upside-down, get a bunch of newspapers
or magazines, and place them under the four corners or at both
ends to prevent damage to the buttons and controls. Also, you
should try to orient the unit so no buttons or controls get
damaged.
915
928
•Save the bag in which the board was originally shipped, and
put the board back into it whenever you need to store or
transport it.
911
912
●
Do not touch any of the printed circuit pathways or connection
terminals.
●
●
Never use excessive force when installing a circuit board. If it
doesn’t fit properly on the first attempt, remove the board and
929
●
When turning the unit upside-down, handle with care to avoid
dropping it, or allowing it to fall or tip over.
try again.
913
When circuit board installation is complete, double-check your
work.
Installation de la carte facultative (French language for Canadian Safety
Standard)
Pour de plus amples renseignements sur la procédure
d’installation, reportez-vous à la documentation spécifique à la
carte facultative.
●
Après l’installation, si l’unité ne se remet pas en marche lorsque
vous la rallumez, communiquez avec le centre de service
Roland.
fig.install_F
●
Veuillez suivre attentivement les instructions suivantes quand
vous manipulez la carte afin d’éviter tout risque
d’endommagement des pièces internes par l’électricité statique.
• Toujours toucher un objet métallique relié à la terre (comme un
tuyau par exemple) avant de manipuler la carte pour vous
décharger de l’électricité statique que vous auriez pu
accumuler.
901(F)
Top Panel
Vis retirées
• Lorsque vous manipulez la carte, la tenir par les côtés. Évitez
de toucher aux composants ou aux connecteurs.
• Lorsque vous manipulez la carte, la tenir par les côtés de la
plaque ou par les côtés du circuit imprimé. Évitez de toucher
aux composants ou aux connecteurs.
Option board
Rear Panel
• Avant de connecter tout câble, assurez-vous qu’il ne contient
aucune charge d’électricité statique. De telles charges peuvent
être transmises, par exemple, si l’autre extrémité du câble
touche à un tapis (ou autre objet) où il y a accumulation
d’électricité statique.
• Conservez le sachet d’origine dans lequel était la carte lors de
l’envoi et remettez la carte dedans si vous devez la ranger ou la
transporter.
911(F)
912(F)
●
●
Ne pas toucher aux circuits imprimes ou aux connecteurs.
Ne jamais forcer lors de l’installation de la carte de circuits
imprimes. Si la carte s’ajuste mal au premier essai, enlevez la
carte et recommencez l’installation.
Remarques importantes sur
l’installation
●
Avant d’installer la carte, éteignez l’équipement et débranchez le
cordon d’alimentation de la prise.
●
●
●
Quand l’installation de la carte de circuits imprimes est
terminee, reverifiez si tout est bien installe.
913(F)
914(F)
915(F)
●
●
●
Retirez uniquement les vis indiquées.
Toujours eteindre et debrancher l’appareil avant de commencer
l’installation de la carte. (modele no AR-NT1/AR-NT1R).
N’installez que les cartes de circuits imprimes specifiees (modele
no AR-NT1/AR-NT1R). Enlevez seulement les vis indiquees.
Faites attention de ne pas laisser les vis tomber dans l’unité.
Après avoir retiré le panneau, le couvercle et les vis, ne les
laissez pas ainsi. Une fois terminée l’installation de la carte
facultative, assurez-vous de remettre le panneau, le couvercle et
les vis en place.
●
Faites attention de ne pas vous couper sur l’ouverture
d’installation de la carte.
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation
Attaching the Rubber Feet
Attach these as required, such as when you’re using the AR-3000R without
mounting it on a rack or the like.
Peel off the double-sided tape from the rubber feet and affix the rubber feet
at the locations shown in the following figure.
fig.4-01e
Bottom chassis
Rack Mounting (Important Notes on
Heat Radiation)
When you are mounting the unit on a rack or the like, give attention to the
following points to ensure efficient cooling.
• Install in a well-ventilated location.
• Avoid mounting in a sealed rack. Warm air within the rack cannot
escape and is sucked into the unit again, making efficient cooling
impossible.
• When you are using a stacked mounting arrangement, be especially sure
to provide for adequate ventilation within the rack to keep discharged
air from being sucked back into the unit. If the back surface of the rack
cannot be kept open, then provide a ventilation port or ventilation fan at
accumulates.
• When you are using the unit in a portable case or rack, remove the
covers from the front and back surfaces of the case, so that the front and
back surfaces of the unit are not obstructed.
appears (p. 132), then heat-dissipating measures are needed. Refer to the
cautions just described and check the installed state of the unit and the
rack.
* When placing the unit on the rack, be careful not to pinch your fingers.
* For more information about installation, also see “Placement” in the Important
Notes (p. 5).
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation
Attaching the Card Protector
By attaching the Card Protector (supplied) to the AR-3000R, you can
prevent the memory card from inadvertently being removed from the AR-
3000R.
1
After confirming that the card is securely inserted in the card
slot, use the provided screws to attach the Card Protector, as
shown in the figure below.
fig.CardProtect.e
Card Protector
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Examples of Usage and Connection
for the AR-3000R
You can use the AR-3000R alone or in combination with other AR-3000R
units or other equipment to play audio in a wide variety of scenes. This
section shows some examples of these. You can use these examples as a
starting point for making changes to match your own usage circumstances.
Together with Other Equipment (System
Examples)
Using the Control Input and Output Terminals
Controlling the AR-3000R
● Control Input: Messages, explanations, warnings, announcements, effect
sounds, and the like are played with high sound quality according to control
signals from sensors, buttons, and switches.
from an External Device
(Control Input Terminals)
→ p. 85
fig.5-01e
Sensor
Program Timer
Momentary Switch
p
m
.
Sensor-triggered automatic
broadcasts
Control timer for automatic
broadcasts
•Playback of message broadcasts and
announcements at regular, set times in
offices, factories, or other such areas
•Broadcasts at set times of upcoming
events at amusements areas
Pressing the switch plays back
a set announcement, guidance
message, explanation, or the like
•Guidance announcements made upon
detection of a person's presence
•Playback of event performances at
attractions and other sites
•Set announcements played back as required
•Broadcast of museum exhibition explanations
or guidance
Types of External Control
Power Amp
Control Signal
Audio Signal
Controlling Another
Device with the AR-3000R
(Control Output Terminals)
→ p. 102
● Control Output: Control signals can be output during or after phrase
playback to control an external device.
fig.5-02e
Busy Out
Control Signal
Audio Signal
Power Amp
Power Unit
Only during phrase playback, power amp or other
gear is powered up (delay time set to five seconds)
Power
Lamp lights during phrase playback
Reray
Switch
Control Out
After playback ends, controls external device
Power Amp
•Extinguishing lights
•When elevator doors are closed and
other similar situations
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Examples of Usage and Connection for the AR-3000R
Using the MIDI Connectors
Controlling the AR-3000R
Using MIDI Signals (MIDI
Control) → p. 105
● Spatial Expression
With the AR-3000R serving as the master, the MIDI signals it sends out can
be used to get a sound module to play background music. Or, you can have
sound-effect phrases be played by a slaved AR-3000R. This lets you create
sonic fields with six-channel multi-playback.
fig.5-03e
(for MIDI Sequencer)
MIDI patch bay
MIDI signal
Audio signal
Sound Module
Power Amp.
Power Amp.
Power Amp.
● Sound-field Control
Using batch MIDI control from a switch box, you can change programs on a
mixer, equalizer, or the like to control the sonic field.
fig.5-04e
Switch box
(for MIDI Sequencer)
Digital Mixer
& Console
Control signal
MIDI signal
MIDI patch bay
Equalizer
Audio signal
Power Amp.
Power Amp.
Equalizer
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the RS-232C Connector
Controlling the AR Using
the RS-232C Connector →
p. 119
By connecting an RS-232C cable, you can control the AR-3000R from an
external control device, such as a computer or touch panel.
fig.5-05e
Control signal
Audio signal
●AR Control with a computer
Power Amp.
●Explanatory messages and guidance for public facilities and museum exhibits
CONTROL PANEL
Control Interface
Power Amp.
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Examples of Usage and Connection for the AR-3000R
Connections (Connection Methods)
Dual Mono Mode
The Dual Mono mode is a feature for playing different mono audio phrases
independently on the left and right channels. This lets you use the unit to
play two units’s worth of data.
Playing Two Unit’s Worth
of Data on the Left and
Right (Dual Mono Mode)
→ p. 120
You can also play back separate phrases on the left and right channels
simultaneously, or control them individually.
fig.5-06e
Power Amp.
Exhibit A
Control signal
Exhibit B
Audio signal
AR-LINK
● Connecting with the AR-LINK Cable
Synchronized Recording
and Playback with Multiple
AR Units (AR-LINK) → p.
123
You can operate four AR-3000R units completely in sync as an eight-channel
multi-player.
fig.5-07e
Power Amp.
Control input
Control signal
Audio signal
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Examples of Usage and Connection for the AR-3000R
What You Can Do (Usage Tips)
Repeat Playback of the Same Phrase
There are several methods for doing this. Choose a playback method that
matches your usage conditions.
Setting the Phrase Information for Repeat Play
You can repeat each individual phrase.
Repeat Play → p. 57
You can also do repeat play for a phrase combination (a group of phrases).
Phrase Combinations → p.
62
Inputting a Continuous Make-contact Signal to the Control Input
Terminals
You can repeat playback by continuously shorting the control input
terminals.
* With some settings, playback doesn’t repeat even when you continuously input a
make-contact signal.
For information, refer to “Controlling the AR-3000R from an External
Device (Control Input Terminals)” (p. 85).
Playing a Variety of Phrases in Succession
There are several methods for doing this. Choose a playback method that
matches your usage conditions.
Using Phrase Combinations
Phrase Combinations → p.
This continuously plays back stored phrases in succession.
62
Using Direct Playback of Control Input
By inputting control signals to a port number from 1 through 16, you can
play back the phrase assigned to the number.
Direct Playback → p. 86
Using Program Playback of Control Input
This successively plays back phrases in preset sequence each time a control
signal is input to the START port.
Program Playback → p. 89
Using Binary Playback of Control Input
You can select phrases by inputting binary signals to port numbers 1
through 10, and play the selected phrases in succession each time you input
control signals to the START port.
Binary Playback→ p. 92
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On the Power
941
* Once the connections have been completed (p. 40), turn on power to your various
devices in the order specified. By turning on devices in the wrong order, you risk
causing malfunction and/or damage to speakers and other devices.
Power on your equipment as described in the following. After the devices
are powered on, set the volumes to each connected devices equipment.
Connected devices → AR-3000R → Power Amplifier etc.
This unit is equipped with
a protection circuit. A brief
interval (a few seconds)
after power up is required
before the unit will operate
normally.
942
1
Confirm the volume levels on the AR-3000R and any amp or
mixer that is connected turned down to the lowest settings.
2
Press the POWER switch to turn on the power.
To avoid risk of electric
shock, do not touch the
connectors while the unit is
in operation.
3
Watch the display.
* This display is only an example for illustrative purposes, The content of the display
will differ depending on the card settings.
Turning Off The Power
945
1
Confirm the volume levels on the AR-3000R and any amp or
If you need to turn off the
power completely, first
turn off the POWER switch,
then unplug the power
cord from the power outlet.
Refer to Power Supply (p.
5)
mixer that is connected turned down to the lowest settings.
2
Switch off the power of the device in the reverse order of that
used to switch on the power.
The display will go dark, indicating that the power has been turned off.
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Easy Setting Operations!—EZ SETUP
What Is EZ Setup?
On the AR-3000R, settings are normally made by using the MODE button to
enter the setting mode, then selecting the needed items from the various
menu levels.
EZ Setup is an interactive method for making settings, whereby you first
select the target and the feature you want to use, then make the necessary
settings, one after another.
Use this feature if you’re using the AR-3000R for the first time, if you don’t
know what items need to be set, or when you need to change the settings in
a hurry during play.
What You Can Do with EZ Setup
like the ones shown below.
A. Creating Cards
1. Creating a New Card (p. 31)
2. Copying a Card (p. 76)
3. Using AR-2000 Cards (p. 78)
B. Recording Phrases
1. Audio Recording (Line Input) (p. 40)
2. Audio Recording (Line + Mic) (p. 40)
3. Audio Recording (Digital Connectors) (p. 40)
4. MIDI Recording (p. 82)
C. Phrase Editing
1. Phrase Information Settings (p. 54)
• Playback Volume Setting
• Loop Play
• Repeat Play
2. Combining Phrase (p. 62)
• Creating Pattern Phrases
• Creating Song Phrases
3. Modifying Phrases (p. 67)
• Deleting Phrases
• Splitting Phrases
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Easy Setting Operations!—EZ SETUP
• Joining Phrases
• Expanding and Compressing Playback Times (Time Stretch)
• Copying Phrases
D. Control from an External Device
• Selected Playback of Stored Phrases
• Sequential Playback of Stored Phrases
• Playback of Specified Phrase Numbers
• Recording Specified Phrase Numbers
2. Playback Using MIDI Signals (p. 105)
3. Control Using RS-232C (p. 119)
F. Synchronizing Multiple Devices
1. Synchronization Using AR-LINK (p. 123)
2. Synchronization Using MIDI (p. 110)
G. LCD Settings
1. Adjusting LCD Contrast (p. 37)
2. LCD Auto Power-off (p. 38)
H. Control Output Signal Settings
1. Signal Settings for Starting Other Equipment (p. 102)
2. Signal Settings for Controlling Other Equipment (p. 104)
I. Line Output Settings
1. Line Thru Settings During Playback (p. 125)
2. Adjusting the Sound Quality of Audio Phrases (p. 126)
3. Locking Output Volume (p. 127)
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Easy Setting Operations!—EZ SETUP
Examples of EZ Setup Use
This section describes “recording audio” as an example of operations using
EZ Setup.
Recording Audio
Refer to “Connecting Equipment” (p. 40) and connect the external
equipment.
1
2
Press the EZ SETUP button.
The EZ SETUP indicator lights up.
Turn the SELECT dial to choose the “Recording Phrases” icon,
then press the dial.
fig.EZ-01
Number of icons on the menu
Present icon location
The present screen content and messages are scrolled at the bottom of the
screen.
In each step, each press of
the PAUSE (BACK) button
lets you go back one screen.
3
4
Turn the SELECT dial to choose the “Audio Recording (Line
Input)” icon, then press the dial.
fig.EZ-02
Turn the SELECT dial to choose “Card to Record (A/B),” then
press the dial.
fig.EZ-03
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Easy Setting Operations!—EZ SETUP
5
Turn the SELECT dial to choose the phrase number to record,
then press the dial.
6
Turn the SELECT dial to choose the recording type (Stereo or
Mono), then press the dial.
fig.EZ-04
7
Turn the SELECT dial to choose the RDAC grade (High-
quality, Normal, or Extended-time).
fig.EZ-05
When you press the SELECT dial, a screen like the one below appears.
fig.EZ-06
8
Turn the SELECT dial to choose “YES,” then press the ENTER
button to enter recording standby.
fig.EZ-07
9
Use the INPUT VOLUME control to adjust the recording level,
then press the ENTER button to start recording.
fig.EZ-08
10
Press the STOP button to stop recording.
fig.EZ-09
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Easy Setting Operations!—EZ SETUP
11
12
Turn the SELECT dial to choose “End,” then press the dial to
In the provided EZ Setup
menus, depending on the
selected item, the settings
may be made using the
normal setting screens.
However, when you finish
making all necessary
settings, you are returned
to the initial EZ Setup
screen.
return to the initial EZ Setup screen.
* Selecting “playback” and pressing the ENTER button plays back what you
recorded.
* Pressing “Try again” returns you to step 4 so you can record again.
Press the EZ SETUP button to return to the normal screen.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cards Compatible with the AR-3000R
Types of Usable Cards
The AR-3000R stores recorded audio and MIDI signals on the card.
Also, all information other than recorded audio (phrase information) is
Information cannot be
stored on the card as well. (That is, it is not stored in the AR unit itself.)
stored in memory in the
AR unit itself, so be sure to
purchase cards separately.
There are several types of
card capacities available.
The amount of information
that you can store differs
according to card capacity.
This means that you can change the settings simply by swapping cards.
You can use the ARE-3000 AR Card Editor software to back up all of the data
on memory cards using a Windows computer. When restoring backed up
data to memory cards, be sure to use memory cards formatted with the AR.
* Please download the ARE-3000(free of charge) from the following URL.
http://www.rssamerica.com
Depending on the type of
CF card you are using, it
may not be possible to
perform recording or
playback at the set RDAC-
Grade and RDAC-Mode
due to data write speed
and other factors.
Card Storage Times and Number of
Phrases
You can create up to 1,000 phrases on a single card.
When you format a card, you preselect 250, 500, or 1,000 as the maximum
number of phrases to record on the card.
* The possible recording time of a card varies according to card capacity and recording
settings.
Depending on the length of
stored phrases, it may not
be possible to create the set
maximum number of
phrases.
* After formatting, you cannot change the maximum number of phrases. Please be
aware that changing the maximum number of phrases requires reformatting, which
erases everything stored on the card.
* When you are using Card Conversion to convert a created card to AR-2000 format,
select either 250 or 500 as the setting for the maximum number of phrases.
For information about
maximum recording times
under various settings,
refer to the “Card-specific
Audio Recording Time
Chart” in Appendices (p.
134).
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cards Compatible with the AR-3000R
Formatting a Card
Before you can use a new card, or a card that was formerly used on another
device, you must first format (initialize) the card.
The time required for
formatting also depends on
the card type (capacity),
and may take from several
seconds to more than a
minute.
Once the formatting is complete, you can give the card a name (using up to
eight characters). When you record a phrase, this card name is automatically
added to the beginning of the phrase name.
Example: Card name: MESSAGE → Phrase name: MESSAGE 1
* If you don’t give the card a name, the name “AR-3000” is used.
Important Note About Formatting
In order to demonstrate the
full performance of the AR-
3000R, we recommend
• Do not format cards on a computer.
• Formatting erases all data on the ard. Before you format a card, make
certain it does not contain any important data.
formatting for a maximum
number of 1,000 phrases.
• You can create up to 1,000 phrases on a single card.
When you format a card, you preselect 250, 500, or 1,000 as the maximum
number of phrases to record on the card.
Depending on the length of
stored phrases, it may not
be possible to create the set
maximum number of
phrases.
* The possible recording time of a card varies according to card capacity and recording
settings.
* After formatting, you cannot change the maximum number of phrases. Please be
aware that changing the maximum number of phrases requires reformatting, which
erases everything stored on the card.
* When you are using Card Conversion to convert a created card to AR-2000 format,
select either 250 or 500 as the setting for the maximum number of phrases.
For information about
maximum recording times
under various settings,
refer to the “Card-specific
Audio Recording Time
Chart” in Appendices (p.
134).
Procedure for Formatting a Card
1
Make sure no CF cards are inserted into card slots A and B,
For information about the
initial values of various
settings when formatted,
refer to “Settings When a
Card Is Formatted” (p. 135).
then switch on the power.
2
Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up.
3
Use the SELECT dial to choose “4.1 Card Format,” then press
When you insert an
unformatted card, an error
message is displayed.
Follow the on-screen
instructions to format the
card.
the dial.
4
Insert the card you want to format into card slot A or B.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cards Compatible with the AR-3000R
5
Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card you want to format
(A or B), then press the dial.
fig.07-g01e
6
Turn the SELECT dial to choose the maximum number of
phrases that can be recorded on the card (250, 500, or 1,000),
then press the dial.
7
When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER
button to enable the settings.
Never attempt to remove
the card while formatting is
in progress.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,”
then press the ENTER button.
8
When formatting ends, enter the card name. Turn the SELECT
dial to choose a character.
Press the dial to confirm the selected character.
fig.07-g02e
• Characters you can use: Letters of the alphabet (upper case) space
numerals - ! # $ % & ‘ ( ) @ ^ _ { }
• FWD: This advances the location for entering a character. Pressing the
dial advances the entry location by one.
• BACK: This moves back the location for entering a character. Pressing
the dial moves back the entry location by one.
• INS: This inserts a space. Pressing the dial inserts a single space.
• DEL: This deletes a character. Pressing the dial deletes a single
character.
• END: This quits the settings process.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cards Compatible with the AR-3000R
9
To quit saving, in step 8, turn the SELECT dial to choose
“END,” then press the dial.
fig.07-g03e
10
When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER
button to enable the settings.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,”
then press the ENTER button.
• When you’re finished making the setting, the display returns to the
setting item selection screen.
11
Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and
returns you to the usual screen.
* While making the settings, you can go back to the previous entry position
(highlighted) by using the PAUSE (BACK) button.
* If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message asking you to
confirm that you want to exit the setting process appears. Note that if you choose
“YES,” then press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all
setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded.
Important Notes on Handling Cards
●When Inserting
Securely insert the card as far as it will go into the card slot.
●When Removing
To remove a card, press the eject button.
Never attempt to remove a card while the card access indicator is
illuminated.
Also, do not switch off the power or unplug the power cord while the card
access indicator is illuminated. Doing so may damage the card.
931
* Carefully insert the Memory card all the way in—until it is firmly in place.
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cards Compatible with the AR-3000R
Card Compatibility with Other Models
in the AR Series
The AR-3000R’s file format is the same as the format for the AR-3000/200/
200S.
Using Cards Formatted on Earlier Model Units with
the AR-3000R
• Compact Flash cards used with AR-3000/200/200Ss can be used as is
with the AR-3000R.
• Files on PC cards used on AR-3000/200/2000/100 models can be used
by copying the data to CompactFlash with the ARE-3000.
In addition, cards can be copied with the AR-3000 using a Compact
Flash Card Adaptor (cards which have not been copied using ARE-3000
or an AR-3000 cannot be used).
Using Cards Formatted on the AR-3000R with
Earlier Models
• Cards can be used as is with the AR-3000/200/200S.
• Cards can be used as is with the AR-3000/200 by copying the data to PC
card (PM series) with the ARE-3000. (Use a Compact Flash Card
Adaptor.)
• Cards cannot be used with the AR-2000/100.
(Cards copied using other AR models cannot be used.)
Please download the ARE-3000 (free of charge) from the following URL.
http://www.rssamerica.com/
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Display
Viewing the Basic Screen
Screen During Audio Phrase Playback
During normal audio phrase playback, the display shows the following
information.
Stereo phrase
fig.08-g01e
You can the Elapsed Time/
Remaining Time display by
pressing the ENTER button
during playback or while
playback is paused.
Icon indicating a stereo phrase
Phrase Name
Phrase Number
Remaining Time/Elapsed Time
(When stopped, the playback time
for the phrase is displayed.)
RDAC-Grade
RDAC-Mode
Phrase Name
Mono phrase
fig.08-g01ae
Icon indicating a mono phrase
Phrase Number
Remaining Time/Elapsed Time
(When stopped, the playback time
for the phrase is displayed.)
RDAC-Grade
RDAC-Mode
Screen During MIDI Phrase Playback
During MIDI phrase playback, the display shows the following information.
fig.08-g02e
MIDI Phrases → p. 82
Icon indicating a MIDI phrase
Phrase name
Phrase Number
Number of the measure now being
played back
RDAC-Mode
Screen During Pattern Phrase or Song Phrase
Playback
During pattern phrase or song phrase playback, the display shows the
Pattern Phrases and Song
following information.
Phrases → p. 62, p. 65
Pattern phrase
fig.08-g03e
Icon indicating a Pattern phrase
Pattern phrase Name
Remaining Time/Elapsed Time
Number of the phrase now being played back
Pattern phrase Mode
Pattern phrase Number
Standby
Playback
Song phrase
fig.08-g03ae
Icon indicating a Song phrase
Song phrase Name
Song phrase Number
Remaining Time/Elapsed Time
Number of the phrase now being played back
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Display
Viewing the 7-segment Display
The following information appears in the upper part of the display.
* Although seven-segment displays are shown in this manual, the actual device uses
a dot matrix display.
fig.8-01e
For items that do not
function with AR-LINK,
“---” is displayed.
DELAY
REPEAT
VOL LOOP
CONT OUT
● DELAY (Delay Time)
When the “Delay Time” setting for a phrase during playback has been
made, this shows the progress.
Delay Time → p. 55
• This shows the time until playback starts (S: second, F: frame).
• When no delay has been set, “0000” is displayed.
● REPEAT
When the “Repeat Play” setting for a phrase during playback has been
made, this shows the progress.
Repeat Play → p. 57
• This shows the setting for the number of repetitions.
• When the setting for the repeat interval has been made, this shows the
time from when phrase playback ends until playback of the next phrase
starts (M: minute, S: second).
• When Repeat Play is set to “On (Endless),” then “on” is displayed.
• When Repeat Play is set to “Off,” then “OFF” is displayed.
● CONT OUT (Control Out)
When the “Control Out” setting for a phrase during playback has been
made, this shows the progress.
Control Out → p. 59
• This shows the offset time set for Control Out (the time after phrase
playback until output—M: minute, S: second).
• When Control Out is set to “Off,” then “OFF” is displayed.
● VOL (Volume)
This displays the playback volume setting for audio phrases.
Play Volume → p. 54
• For MIDI phrases, “---” is displayed.
● LOOP
When the “Loop Play” setting for a phrase during playback has been made,
this shows the progress.
• This shows the setting for the number of loops.
• When the number of loops is set to “On (Endless),” then “on” is
displayed.
• When the number of loops is set to “Off,” then “OFF” is displayed.
• For pattern phrases, song phrases, and MIDI phrases, “---” is displayed.
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Display
Loop Play → p. 57
Display-related Settings
Adjusting the Contrast
You can adjust the contrast of the display. Adjust it to match your usage
conditions.
Procedure for Adjusting the Display Contrast
1
Press the MODE button.
The MODE indicator lights up.
2
Use the SELECT dial to choose “10.1 Contrast,” then press the
dial.
3
Turn the SELECT dial to set Contrast (-10 to +10), then press
the dial.
fig.08-g04e
4
When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER
button to enable the settings.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,”
then press the ENTER button.
When you’re finished making the setting, the display returns to the setting
item selection screen.
5
Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and
returns you to the usual screen.
* Pressing the MODE button while making the setting displays a prompt asking you
whether you want to quit making the setting. Note that choosing “YES” and
pressing the ENTER button returns you to the usual screen, discarding any
settings made up to that point.
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Display
Making the Display Go Dark
You can make the display go dark automatically after a certain period of
time has elapsed following the last operation in the phrase playback screen.
You can set the time until the display goes dark (Sleep Time) to anything
from 30 seconds to 59 minutes 59 seconds.
When the unit is in continuous use for long periods, such as on systems that
run 24 hours a day, this can help protect the display from deterioration. Set
it to match your usage conditions.
When the display is dark, the EZ SETUP indicator flashes.
When the display is dark, you can make it appear again quickly by pressing
any of the six buttons on the front panel.
Procedure for Making the Display Go Dark
1
Press the MODE button.
The MODE indicator lights up.
2
Use the SELECT dial to choose “9.6 Display Sleep,” then press
the dial.
3
Turn the SELECT dial to choose Display Sleep (ON), then
press the dial.
4
Turn the SELECT dial to make the setting for Sleep Time (00m
30sec to 59m 59sec), then press the dial.
fig.08-g05e
5
When the prompt appears on the screen, press the ENTER
button to enable the settings.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,”
then press the ENTER button.
When you’re finished making the setting, the display returns to the setting
item selection screen.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Display
6
Press the MODE button. This ends the setting process and
returns you to the usual screen.
* While making the settings, you can go back to the previous entry position
(highlighted) by using the PAUSE (BACK) button.
* Pressing the MODE button while making the setting displays a prompt asking you
whether you want to quit making the setting. Note that choosing “YES” and
pressing the ENTER button returns you to the usual screen, discarding any
settings made up to that point.
Making the Display Appear Again
fig.8-02e
When the display is dark, you can make it appear again quickly by pressing
any of the six buttons.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording Audio
Recording Units—Phrases
A single item of data recorded from the point where you start recording
until the point where you stop recording is called a phrase. Audio data and
MIDI data are both handled as phrases. Phrases are managed by phrase
numbers.
MIDI Phrases → p. 82
fig.09-g01e
Phrase Number Phrase Name
Connecting Equipment
The AR-3000R has a Mic jack on the front and an Analog Line In jack(LINE
IN) and a Digital In jack(DIGITAL IN) on the back. Make the connections as
appropriate for the equipment being used for recording.
You cannot use the Mic and
Digital In jacks at the same
time.
You can also use the Mic jack and the Line In jack (analog only) at the same
time. When you do this, it’s possible to mix the Mic and Line In (analog)
input.
fig.09-01e (Connections for Recording)
Powered Speaker
For monitor
Headphone
Microphone
CF Card
CompactFlash™
IN (ANALOG)
IN (DIGITAL)
To prevent malfunction
and/or damage to speakers
or other devices, always
turn down the volume, and
turn off the power on all
devices before making any
connections.
OUT (DIGITAL)
OUT (ANALOG)
Sound Recording Device
983
* Howling could be produced depending on the location of microphones relative to
speakers. This can be remedied by:
1. Changing the orientation of the microphone(s).
2. Relocating microphone(s) at a greater distance from speakers.
3. Lowering volume levels.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording Audio
Monitor Output During Recording and Recording Standby
Audio input from the Mic jack and the Digital In jack is output from the
Balanced Output jacks, Headphone jack, and Mono Out port only during
recording or recording standby, and you can monitor the recording state.
Audio input from the Line In jacks can be output from the Balanced Output
jacks, Headphone jack, and Mono Out port during recording or recording
standby, or even during ordinary playback.
* Audio input from the Mic jack and the Digital In jack cannot be output to the
Balanced Output jacks, Headphone jack, and Mono Out port during playback.
Line Thru Settings → p.
125
The quality of sounds output from the audio output jack differs from that of
RDAC-Grade or RDAC-Mode sound quality. Be sure to play back the
phrase after recording to confirm the quality of the content.
Procedure for Recording
Important! Cards in AR-2000 format cannot be used.
If a card in AR-2000 format is inserted in either slot A or B (or both), the AR-
or make any settings (except for card conversion and card format). Also, if
you insert a card in AR-2000 format into slot A or B (or both) while making
settings (except for card conversion and card format), the operation will halt
with an error message. Thereafter, the operation cannot be resumed until all
cards are removed. To record or edit cards in AR-2000 format on the AR-
3000R, follow the steps in “Card Convert” (p. 78).
Enabling Recording Standby
Make the correct connections, then turn on the power switch.
Turning the Power On and
Off → p. 24
Recording Standby
1
Insert a formatted card(p. 31) into one of the slots.
2
Turn the SELECT dial to choose the phrase number you want
to record.
To switch between card slots A and B, press the SELECT dial.
* You cannot change the phrase number after recording, so be sure to select the phrase
number you want to record.
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording Audio
3
Hold down the STOP button and press the PLAY button to go
into recording standby.
During recording standby, the PLAY indicator and the PAUSE indicator
flash in red.
fig.09-g02e
When you have created a
new phrase by re-
recording, the following
phrase information remains
in effect and is not deleted.
1.1 Playback Volume
(except MIDI Phrase)
1.2 Delay Time
If you try to re-record a phrase that’s already been recorded, a prompt
message appears.
If you choose “YES” and press the Enter button, the recorded data for the
phrase is deleted and the unit goes into recording standby. If you choose
“NO,” the unit returns to the normal display.
1.4 Repeat Play
1.6 Fade (except MIDI
Phrase)
* Please be aware that data deleted here cannot be recovered, even if you cancel
recording standby without recording anything.
1.7 Control Out
1.8 MIDI Tempo (only
* When Card Protect (p. 77) is set to “ON,” recorded phrases are protected and
recording is not possible (writing, overwriting, deleting, and editing card data is
prohibited).
MIDI Phrase)
Phrase Name
1.9
Required Settings for Recording Audio Signals
(Recording Settings)
In order perform recording matched to usage conditions, including the
connected equipment, recording source, sound quality, time, and playback
• Recording settings are made in phrase units. You can mix phrases
having different recording settings on a single card.
• The possible recording time of a card varies according to the recording
settings. For a rough guide to maximum recording times with various
settings, see the “Card-specific Audio Recording Time Chart” in
Appendices (p. 134).
* When you don’t change the recording settings, the recording settings for the most
recent recording made on the specified card are used.
* If you don’t need to change the recording settings in effect when the card was
formatted, you can proceed to “Adjusting the Recording Level” (p. 48).
Recording Settings in Effect When a Card Is Formatted
• REC-IN (Selected recording connector):
• RDAC-Grade:
LINE-IN
STANDARD
MODE3
STEREO
OFF
Settings When a Card Is
• RDAC-Mode:
Formatted → p. 135
• REC Type:
• Trig Level (Trigger recording setting):
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording Audio
What’s RDAC?
RDAC (Roland Digital Audio Coding) is a proprietary audio recording
standard from Roland.
It achieves high sound quality and also makes it possible to record for long
times.
REC-IN (Selecting the Recording Connector)
Set the input connector to record from. Make the selection to match the
connected device.
• LINE-IN:
LINE IN jacks
The “DIGITAL-IN” setting
cannot be used when no
device is connected to the
DIGITAL IN jack
• LINE+MIC-IN: LINE IN jacks and Mic jack
• DIGITAL-IN:
DIGITAL IN jack
• MIDI-IN:
MIDI connector (In)
Procedure for Selecting the Recording Connector
1
Put the unit into recording standby.
2
Turn the SELECT dial to choose “REC-In.”
3
Press the SELECT dial to advance the input location
(highlighted).
fig.09-g03e
4
Turn the SELECT dial to choose the REC-In (for audio
recording, this is LINE-IN, LINE+MIC-IN or DIGITAL-IN),
then press the ENTER button.
fig.09-g04e
* Please be aware that if you press the SELECT dial instead of the ENTER button, the
setting is not confirmed.
• Next, if you’re making the setting for “RDAC-Grade” (p. 44), you can
proceed to step 2 of the procedure for setting the RDAC-Grade.
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording Audio
RDAC-Grade (Sampling Frequency)
The RDAC-Grade is the type of sampling frequency for digital recording.
On the AR-3000R, you can select from among six grades.
The setting for the RDAC-
Grade is made only for
analog audio recording
(selected connector: LINE-
IN, LINE+MIC-IN). For
digital recording, the
setting is made
fig.09-02e (RDAC Grade)
Sound
Amount of card
quality memory consumed
High
Large
S-HIGH
HIGH
:
:
48 kHz
automatically.
44.1 kHz
STANDARD : 32 kHz
LONG1
LONG2
:
:
22.05 kHz
16 kHz
ANNOUNCE : 8 kHz
Small
“S-HIGH” enables recording at the highest sound quality, but uses the most
space on the card. “STANDARD” is best for ordinary recording.
“ANNOUNCE” uses up the least card space, and is best for recording
announcements, narration, and the like. When you are recording audio such
as a narration with “ANNOUNCE” or “LONG2,” you can record with
higher clarity by using the equalizer (external device) to cut the bass range.
Select an RDAC -Grade that matches the circumstances of use.
• If the type of card does not provide the recording time you want, change
the RDAC-Mode or RDAC-Grade setting to use less card capacity, then
perform recording again.
“Card-specific Recording
Time Chart” → p. 134
• Depending on the card type, an error may appear or recording may
stop. If this happens, change the RDAC-Mode or RDAC-Grade setting to
use less card capacity, then perform recording again.
“Error Messages” → p. 132
Procedure for Setting the RDAC-Grade
1
Put the unit into recording standby.
2
Turn the SELECT dial to choose “RDAC-Grade,” then press
the dial.
* You can set the RDAC-Grade only when you have selected “LINE-IN” or
“LINE+MIC-IN” for the recording connector.
fig.09-g05e
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording Audio
3
Turn the SELECT dial to choose RDAC-Grade (ANNOUNCE,
LONG2, LONG1, STANDARD, HIGH, or S-HIGH), then press
the ENTER button.
fig.09-g06e
* Pressing the PLAY button or the PAUSE button instead of the ENTER button
starts recording without locking in the setting.
* Please be aware that if you press the SELECT dial instead of the ENTER button, the
setting is not confirmed.
• The display of remaining time on the card available for recording
changes according to the selected RDAC-Grade.
• Next, if you’re making the setting for “RDAC-Mode”, you can proceed
to step 2 of the procedure for setting the RDAC-Mode.
RDAC-Mode (Signal Processing System)
The RDAC-Mode is a type of digital data processing system for recording.
On the AR-3000R, you can choose from among five types of modes.
fig.09-03e (RDAC Mode)
Sound
Amount of card
quality memory consumed
24 bit PCM Recording
H-LINEAR:
High
Large
16 bit PCM Recording
LINEAR
MODE3
MODE2
MODE1
:
:
:
:
About 2.5 times the recording of Linear
More than 2.5 times the recording of Linear
About 4 times the recording of Linear
* 1
Small
“H-LINEAR” enables recording at the highest sound quality, but uses the
most space on the card. “MODE1” uses up the least card space, and is suited
to long recording times. Select an RDAC-Mode that matches the
circumstances of use.
• If the type of card does not provide the recording time you want, change
the RDAC-Mode or RDAC-Grade setting to use less card capacity, then
perform recording again.
“Card-specific Recording
Time Chart” → p. 134
• Depending on the card type, an error may appear or recording may
stop. If this happens, change the RDAC-Mode or RDAC-Grade setting to
use less card capacity, then perform recording again.
“Error Messages” → p. 132
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording Audio
* 1 Important Notes When Recording with MODE2 or MODE3
Recording times available when in MODE2 are about the same as in
MODE3, or slightly longer. However, note that for phrases recorded in
MODE2, you cannot make settings for some of the items in the phrase
settings (Phrase Information (p. 54) and Phrase Editing (p. 67)).
<Unsettable Items for Phrases Recorded in MODE2>
●Phrase Information
• 1.3 Playback Point
• 1.5 Loop Play
●Phrase Editing
• 3.2 Phrase Truncate
• 3.4 Phrase Divide
• 3.5 Phrase Combine
• 3.6 Time Stretch
Procedure for Setting the RDAC-Mode
1
Put the unit into recording standby.
2
Turn the SELECT dial to choose “RDAC-Mode,” then press the
dial.
fig.09-g07e
3
Turn the SELECT dial to choose the RDAC-Mode (MODE1,
MODE2, MODE3, LINEAR, or H-LINEAR), then press the
ENTER button.
fig.09-g08e
* Pressing the PLAY button or the PAUSE button instead of the ENTER button
starts recording without locking in the setting.
* Please be aware that if you press the SELECT dial instead of the ENTER button, the
setting is not confirmed.
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording Audio
• The display of remaining time on the card available for recording
changes according to the selected RDAC-Mode.
• Next, if you’re making the setting for “REC Type”, proceed to step 2 of
the procedure for setting the recording type.
If You’re Not Sure About Which Grade and Mode to Choose
The optimal grade and mode vary according to the usage conditions,
including the connected equipment, recording source, sound quality, time,
and playback system.
When a card is formatted, the RDAC-Grade is set to STANDARD and the
RDAC-Mode is set to MODE3.
First, try recording and playback with these settings. In most cases, this
yields satisfactory sound quality.
REC Type (STEREO or MONO)
Select either stereo recording or mono recording.
Choosing mono recording gives you recording times that are twice as long
as with stereo recording.
Procedure for Setting the Recording Type
1
Put the unit into recording standby.
2
Turn the SELECT dial to choose “REC Type,” then press the
dial.
fig.09-g09e
3
Turn the SELECTdial to choose the REC Type (STEREO or
MONO), then press the ENTER button.
fig.09-g10e
* Pressing the PLAY button or the PAUSE button instead of the ENTER button
starts recording without locking in the setting.
* Please be aware that if you press the SELECT dial instead of the ENTER button, the
setting is not confirmed.
• The display of remaining time on the card available for recording
changes according to the selected recording settings.
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording Audio
• Next, if you’re making the setting for the “Trig Level”, proceed to step 2
of the procedure for making the trigger recording setting.
Trig Level (Trigger Recording Settings)
A method for starting recording automatically when audio higher than the
trigger level (the volume level for starting recording) is input is called
trigger recording. The following four types of trigger recording settings are
available.
• OFF: Trigger recording is not performed.
• LOW: Recording starts when audio at a low volume level is input (-45
dBm).
• MID:
Recording starts when audio at an intermediate volume level is
input (-36 dBm).
• HIGH: Recording starts when audio at a high volume level is input (-27
dBm).
( ): Trigger level
* When you are recording from microphone input with the trigger level set at
“LOW,” recording may be inadvertently started by ambient noise. If this happens,
change the trigger level to MID or HIGH, or carry out recording in a quieter
location.
* If you quit recording without waiting for trigger recording to start, no phrase is
created.
Procedure for the Trigger Recording Setting
1
Put the unit into recording standby.
2
Turn the SELECT dial to choose “Trig Level,” then press the
dial.
3
Turn the SELECT dial to choose the Trig Level (OFF, LOW,
MID, or HIGH), then press the ENTER button.
* Please be aware that if you press the SELECT dial instead of the ENTER button, the
setting is not confirmed.
Adjusting the Recording Level
Input audio from the connected device and adjust the recording level.
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording Audio
If the input volume level is too high, a symbol (OVER) like the one shown
below appears on the display. If this happens, adjust the recording level by
lowering the volume on the connected device or turning the Input Volume
Knob on the unit so that the symbol does not appear.
fig.09-g13e
Level meter (dB)
Starting and Ending Recording
1
When the unit is in recording standby, pressing the PLAY
button or the PAUSE button starts recording.
During recording, the PLAY indicator lights up in red.
• When you have made the trigger recording setting, the waits for audio
input higher than the trigger level (the volume level at which recording
starts), then starts recording.
fig.09-g14e
2
Press the STOP button to end recording.
* You cannot change the phrase number afterward, so be sure select the phrase
number you want to record before you start recording.
card is used up, recording ends automatically.
Starting and Stopping Recording with Control Input Terminals
You can start and stop recording using a control input terminals.
For information about making the settings, see “Assigning Phrases to Ports”
for Direct playback (p. 88).
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording Audio
Checking What You Recorded
After recording ends, you can play back the phrase by pressing the PLAY
button.
You can verify the phrase’s RDAC-Grade, RDAC-Mode, recording type,
and recording time by viewing the display.
fig.09-g15e
Recording type Phrase name
RDAC-Grade RDAC-Mode
Recording time
Information Recorded on the Card
The AR-3000R stores recorded audio and MIDI signals on the card.
It also stores all the setting information (such as MIDI settings) other than
the unit’s setting (Contrast) on the card.
This means you can switch all settings to the settings stored on a card simply
by swapping cards.
Important Note: About Setting Information
Imported from a Card
When you insert a card into slot, the unit imports setting information from
the card. When a card is inserted in only one of the slots, the unit imports
setting information from the card, but note the following points when
cards are inserted into both slot A and slot B.
The Following Setting Information Is Imported from the Card in
Slot A
• Control input settings
• MIDI settings
• RS-232C settings
• AR-LINK settings
• System settings
* Note that when the settings just described on cards in slots A and B are different,
the settings just described on the card in slot B do not take effect.
The Following Setting Information Is Imported from Each Card
• Recording settings
• Phrase settings
• Settings for card editing
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback Using the Panel on the Unit
(Manual Playback)
fig.10-01e
1
3
2
1
2
Insert a card containing recorded information into a slot.
Playback cannot be paused
during crossfades, repeats,
or intervals.
Turn the SELECT dial to choose the phrase number to play. To
switch between card slots A and B, press the SELECT dial.
3
Press the PLAY button to play the phrase.
During playback of the phrase, the PLAY indicator lights up in green.
Playback of audio phrases
whose RDAC-Mode is
• Pressing the PAUSE button pauses audio playback. While playback is
paused, the PLAY (green) and PAUSE (green) indicators flash. To
resume playback, press either the PLAY or the PAUSE button.
MODE2 cannot be paused.
• Pressing the STOP button ends playback.
• During playback, you can choose the next song to play (without
Note that playback cannot be paused in the following cases:
● MIDI phrase (→ p. 82)
● Pattern phrase (→ p. 62)
● Song phrase (→ p. 65)
● Dual Mono mode (ON) (→ p. 120)
Playback Location Search
While paused, you can move the present phrase location forward or
backward by turning the SELECT dial.
To switch the unit of change, press the SELECT dial. (The units cycle
through the sequence of frame → second → minute → hour.)
Pressing the PLAY or PAUSE button again starts playback at the specified
location.
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback Using the Panel on the Unit
Time Shown on the Display
During playback or while playback is paused, you switch the time shown
on the display between “Remaining Time (REMAIN)” and “Elapsed Time”
by pressing the ENTER button.
Elapsed Time
Remaining Time
This shows that it is the remaining time.
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Modifying Recorded Phrases
(Phrase Settings)
SELECT dial. Use this to set a precise point for the playback
Adding Information to
Individual Phrases (Phrase
Information)
point or the like.
Procedure
1. At the various phrase setting screens, press the PLAY
button when making settings such as phrase selections or
playback points.
This adds a variety of information to recorded phrases
(phrase information).
If you want the phrase information when the card was
formatted to remain unchanged, then you don’t need to
change any settings.
A menu (window) for selecting the playback mode appears.
fig.playmode-1
Settings When a Card Is Formatted → p. 135
*
If PLAY is the only selected mode, phrase playback starts at
this time.
To check phrases during various settings, you can play back
and stop phrases using the PLAY and STOP buttons (audio
phrase playback.
2. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the playback mode.
3. Press the PLAY button.
Playback starts, in the selected mode.
*
If you selected SCRUB, you can move the playback passage
during playback by turning the SELECT dial. You can move
the cursor (highlighting) by pressing the BACK button and
the SELECT dial.
The items that can be set differ according to the type of
phrase (audio phrase, MIDI phrase, pattern phrase, or song
phrase). Also refer to the Phrase Information/Phrase Setting
Correspondence Table (p. 75).
Approximate guide to the location of the points for
the entire phrase.
If a card in AR-2000 format is inserted in either slot A or B (or
both), the AR-3000R can be used only for playback, and it is
not possible to record phrases or make any settings (except
for card conversion). Also, if you insert a card in AR-2000
format into slot A or B (or both) while making settings
(except for card conversion), operation will halt with an error
message, and cannot be resumed until such cards are
removed. To record or edit cards in AR-2000 format on the
AR-3000R, follow the steps in “Card Convert” (p. 78).
4. Pressing the STOP button ends playback.
Depending on the location of the cursor on the screen, the
playback mode may not be enabled.
Play Volume (%)
This sets the volume level during playback of audio phrases.
The volume level at the time of recording is considered to be
100%.
Three Useful Playback Modes for
Phrase Settings
The AR-3000R offers three playback modes that you can use
during phrase settings that let you make point settings and
the like, and check settings smoothly.
Procedure for Setting the Play Volume
1. Use the SELECT dial to choose the phrase whose setting
you want to change.
*
The playback modes that you can select vary according to the
setting items.
2. Press the MODE button.
The MODE indicator lights up.
PLAY: This is the mode for normal playback. It plays back
the entire phrase. Use it to check what a phrase includes.
3. Use the SELECT dial to choose “1.1 Play Volume,” then
press the dial.
PREVIEW: This mode plays back phrases with the settings in
effect. Playback is conducted for a fixed time according to the
setting items.
You can reselect a phrase whose setting you want to change
by pressing the PAUSE (BACK) button. The entry position
(highlighted) moves to the phrase selection, so turn the
SELECT dial to reselect card A or B and the phrase number,
then press the dial.
SCRUB: This mode performs loop play (scrub play) of a
desired short passage (about 45 msec) in a phrase. During
playback, you can move the playback passage by turning the
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings)
4. Turn the SELECT dial to set the Volume (from 10% to
at the beginning of the phrase at the time of playback.
100%), then press the dial.
fig.11-g01e
Busy Out → p. 102
Procedure for Setting the Delay Time
1. Use the SELECT dial to choose the phrase whose setting
you want to change.
2. Press the MODE button.
The MODE indicator lights up.
You can play back the selected phrase by pressing the PLAY
button. This makes it possible to make the setting while
monitoring the actual volume level.
3. Use the SELECT dial to choose “1.2 Delay Time,” then
press the dial.
You can reselect a phrase whose setting you want to change
by pressing the PAUSE (BACK) button. The entry position
(highlighted) moves to the phrase selection, so turn the
SELECT dial to reselect card A or B and the phrase number,
then press the dial.
You can change the selected phrase by pressing the BACK
button and moving the cursor to the phrase number.
5. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
4. Turn the SELECT dial to set the Delay Time, then press
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
the dial.
fig.11-g02e
Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
6. Press the MODE button.
5. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
6. Press the MODE button.
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
Delay Time (00s 00f to 59s 29f)
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
This sets the time until phrase playback starts.
*
The frame display varies according to the setting for the MIDI
Time Code (MTC) frame rate.
fig.11-01e
Playback instruction
(Play button, control
input, etc.)
Playback Point (Start and End)
Delay Time
Phrase
These determine where phrase playback is to start and end.
fig.11-02e
Playback passage
Phrase
Playback start
Start
End
If you’re using Busy Out signals to start an amp or the like, inserting
a delay time into the phrase that corresponds to the amp start time
(that it, the time until sound is produced) can help prevent drop-out
*
You can automatically seek and set points at the locations of
silent portions (AUTO).
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings)
Levels of -45 dBm or lower are treated as silent.
5. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
fig.11-03e
ENTER button to enable the settings.
Playback passag
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
Silent portion
Silent portion
Phrase
Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
Start
End
6. Press the MODE button.
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
You can use the phrase-editing Truncate function (p. 67) to
delete data outside the set points.
*
While making the settings, you can go back to the previous
entry location (highlighted) by pressing the PAUSE (BACK)
button.
You cannot make these settings for MODE2 phrases.
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
Procedure for Setting Playback Point
1. Use the SELECT dial to choose the phrase whose setting
you want to change.
2. Press the MODE button.
The MODE indicator lights up.
When Making the Settings Automatically
3. Use the SELECT dial to choose “1.3 Playback Point,” then
press the dial.
7. Turn the SELECT dial to choose Auto as the playback-
point setting method, then press the dial.
You can reselect the phrase whose setting you want to
change by pressing the PAUSE (BACK) button. The entry
position (highlighted) moves to the phrase selection, so turn
the SELECT dial to reselect card A or B and the phrase
number, then press the dial.
fig.11-g03e
The start and end locations are set automatically.
fig.11-g03ae
When Making the Settings Manually
4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose MANUAL as the
playback-point setting method, then press the dial.
fig.11-g03e
You can make fine adjustments in the set points by pressing
the PAUSE (BACK) button, moving the entry position
(highlighted) to the start or end location, and using the
SCRUB playback mode (p. 54).
Turn the SELECT dial to set the start position (time), then
press the dial.
*
Each press of the BACK button moves the cursor (highlighted)
in the sequence of sf → f →s → m → h. Pressing the dial while
the cursor (highlighting) is at the “sf” position moves the end
position setting.
8. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
*
The frame display varies according to the setting for the MIDI
returned to the setting item selection screen.
Turn the SELECT dial to set the end position (time), then
press the dial.
9. Press the MODE button.
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
While setting the points, you can set the points while
listening to the audio by using the SCRUB playback mode (p.
54).
*
While making the settings, you can go back to the previous
entry location (highlighted) by pressing the PAUSE (BACK)
button.
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings)
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
5. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
6. Press the MODE button.
Repeat Play (Repeat, Repeat
Interval)
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
This makes the settings for repeated playback of a phrase.
*
While making the settings, you can go back to the previous
entry location (highlighted) by pressing the PAUSE (BACK)
button.
Repeat passage: This is the passage set with the playback
points (described earlier).
Repeat: This sets the number of times playback is repeated.
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
(For example, when the number of repetitions is set to five
times, the phrase is played back a total of six times.) When
the number of repetitions is set to ON, playback repeats
endlessly.
Repeat Interval: This sets the playback interval as a time
value.
fig.11-04e
Repeat Interval
Loop Play (Loop, Loop 1,
Loop 2, Crossfade Time)
Phrase1
Phrase1
This makes the setting for loop playback of the desired
passage of a phrase. Loop Playback starts at the start point
(playback point), then after looping the specified number of
times, playback ends at the end point (playback point).
Procedure for Making Repeat Play Settings
1. Use the SELECT dial to choose the phrase whose setting
you want to change.
Loop: This sets the number of times playback is looped. (For
example, when the number of loops is set to five times, the
looped phrase is played back a total of six times.) When the
number of loops is set to Endless, playback loops endlessly.
2. Press the MODE button.
The MODE indicator lights up.
3. Use the SELECT dial to choose “1.4 Repeat Play,” then
Loop 1: This specifies the return point for looping.
press the dial.
Loop 2: This specifies the repeat point for looping.
You can reselect a phrase whose setting you want to change
by pressing the PAUSE (BACK) button. The entry position
(highlighted) moves to the phrase selection, so turn the
SELECT dial to reselect card A or B and the phrase number,
then press the dial.
Crossfade Time: This adjusts the junction during loop
playback. Longer times make for progressively greater
smoothness.
fig.11-05e
Loop passage
Phrase
4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose Repeat (OFF/ON/1 to
99), then press the dial.
fig.11-g04e
Loop 1
Loop 2
Loop Play is not possible when in the Dual Mono mode.
You cannot make these settings for MODE2 phrases.
Turn the SELECT dial to set the Repeat Interval (from 00 m
00 s to 59 m 59 s), then press the dial.
*
The number of the repeat interval can be set only when repeat
“ON” or “1–99” is selected.
When the number of loops is set to Endless, playback stops
approximately 50 days after the loop begins.
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings)
returned to the setting item selection screen.
Procedure for Making Loop Play Settings
7. Press the MODE button.
1. Use the SELECT dial to choose the phrase whose setting
you want to change.
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
2. Press the MODE button.
*
While making the settings, you can go back to the previous
entry location (highlighted) by pressing the PAUSE (BACK)
button.
The MODE indicator lights up.
3. Use the SELECT dial to choose “1.5 Loop Play,” then
press the dial.
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
You can reselect a phrase whose setting you want to change
by pressing the PAUSE (BACK) button. The entry position
(highlighted) moves to the phrase selection, so turn the
SELECT dial to reselect card A or B and the phrase number,
then press the dial.
4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose Loop (OFF/ON/1 to 99),
then press the dial.
fig.11-g05e
If a start or end playback point is set within the looped
interval, the start point is set to Loop 1 and the end point is
set to Loop 2.
Loop passage
Phrase
Fade (Fade In and Fade Out)
This makes the settings for starting phrase playback with a
Fade In and ending playback with a Fade Out.
Turn the SELECT dial to set the Loop 1 position (time), then
press the dial. Pressing the dial while the cursor
(highlighting) is at the “sf” position moves the Loop 2
position setting.
This sets the time until the playback level is reached from
silence (Fade In) and the time until silence is reached from
the playback level (Fade Out).
*
The time that is set is shown as a relative amount of time, with
the start position of the playback point taken to be 0.
fig.11-06e
Phrase
*
Each press of the BACK button moves the cursor (highlighted)
in the sequence of sf → f → s → m → h.
Fade In
(Time)
Fade Out
(Time)
Turn the SELECT dial to set the Loop 2 position (time), then
press the dial.
*
The looped region cannot be set to value less than 10 frames.
If there is noise or the like at the beginning or end of a
phrase, you can cause the noise component not to be played
back simply by setting the Fade In or Fade Out times to Time
1 through Time 3.
You can set the points while listening to the audio by using
the SCRUB playback mode (Owner’s Manual p. 54). You can
check the Loop 1 and Loop 2 junctures using the Preview
playback mode.
Time1: Set at approx. 10 msec.
Time2: Set at approx. 30 msec.
5. Turn the SELECT dial, select the Crossfade Time (0
Time3: Set at approx. 50 msec.
fig.11-07e
ms to 1000 ms), then press the dial.
Removal effect when noise or the like is present
Phrase
6. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
Around 10 to 50 milliseconds
ENTER button to enable the settings.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings)
screen.
*
While making the settings, you can go back to the previous
entry location (highlighted) by pressing the PAUSE (BACK)
button.
Setting the Fade In or Fade Out time to about 5 seconds is an
effective way to produce a normal Fade In (crescendo), or
Fade Out (decrescendo) effect.
fig.11-08e
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
Fade In (crescendo)
/Fade Out (decrescendo) effect
Phrase
about 5 sec
about 5 sec
Fade settings may not be properly reflected in situations such
as the following:
When you use the Stop button (or other means) to stop a
phrase during playback for which this setting has been made,
the phrase stops with a Fade Out. If you don’t want a Fade
Out, pressing the Stop button again stops the phrase
immediately.
• When the set fade time is longer than the phrase.
• When fade-in and fade-out settings overlap.
• When loop-interval settings and fade settings overlap.
Procedure for Making the Settings for Fade In
or Fade Out
Control Out
This makes the setting for Control Out operation after phrase
playback ends.
1. Use the SELECT dial to choose the phrase whose setting
you want to change.
2. Press the MODE button.
For detailed information on how to use Control Out, refer to
“Controlling Another Device with the AR-3000R (Control
Output Terminal)” (p. 102).
The MODE indicator lights up.
3. Use the SELECT dial to choose “1.6 Fade,” then press the
dial.
Procedure for Making the Control Out Settings
You can reselect a phrase whose setting you want to change
by pressing the PAUSE (BACK) button. The entry position
(highlighted) moves to the phrase selection, so turn the
SELECT dial to reselect card A or B and the phrase number,
then press the dial.
1. Use the SELECT dial to choose the phrase whose setting
you want to change.
2. Press the MODE button.
The MODE indicator lights up.
4. Turn the SELECT dial to make the setting for Fade In
3. Use the SELECT dial to choose “1.7 Control Out,” then
(time: OFF, Time 1 to Time 3, or from 00.1 to 59.9
press the dial.
seconds), then press the dial.
You can reselect a phrase whose setting you want to change
by pressing the PAUSE (BACK) button. The entry position
(highlighted) moves to the phrase selection, so turn the
SELECT dial to reselect card A or B and the phrase number,
then press the dial.
fig.11-g06e
Turn the SELECT dial to make the setting for Fade Out (time:
OFF, Time 1 to Time 3, or from 00.1 to 59.9 seconds), then
press the dial.
4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose Control Out (OFF or
ON), then press the dial.
fig.11-g07e
5. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
To quit without making the setting, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
Turn the SELECT dial to set the Offset Time (from 00m00s to
59m59s), then press the dial.
6. Press the MODE button.
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings)
*
The offset time can be set only when Control Out “ON” is
selected.
You can play back the selected phrase by pressing the PLAY
button. This makes it possible to make the setting while
monitoring the actual tempo.
5. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
5. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
6. Press the MODE button.
Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
6. Press the MODE button.
*
While making the settings, you can go back to the previous
entry location (highlighted) by pressing the PAUSE (BACK)
button.
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
Phrase Name
Changing the Playback Tempo
Tempo)
This assigns a name to a phrase. You can enter a phrase name
of up to 12 characters. (For a phrase that has already been
recorded, the phrase name is the card name plus the phrase
number.)
This changes the playback tempo for MIDI phrases.
Procedure for Setting the Phrase Name
For detailed information about how to use MIDI phrases,
refer to the chapter “Recording and Playing MIDI Phrases”
(p. 82).
1. Use the SELECT dial to choose the phrase whose setting
you want to change.
2. Press the MODE button.
Procedure for Setting the MIDI Tempo
The MODE indicator lights up.
1. Use the SELECT dial to choose the phrase whose setting
3. Use the SELECT dial to choose “1.9 Phrase Name,” then
you want to change.
press the dial.
2. Press the MODE button.
You can reselect a phrase whose setting you want to change
by pressing the PAUSE (BACK) button. The entry position
(highlighted) moves to the phrase selection, so turn the
SELECT dial to reselect card A or B and the phrase number,
then press the dial.
The MODE indicator lights up.
3. Use the SELECT dial to choose “1.8 MIDI Tempo,” then
press the dial.
You can reselect a phrase whose setting you want to change
by pressing the PAUSE (BACK) button. The entry position
(highlighted) moves to the phrase selection, so turn the
SELECT dial to reselect card A or B and the phrase number,
then press the dial.
4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose a character. Press the
dial to confirm the selected character.
fig.11-g09e
4. Turn the SELECT dial to set the MIDI tempo (from 5 to
Characters you can use: Letters of the alphabet (upper
260), then press the dial.
case) space numerals ! # $ % & ‘ ( ) @ ^ _ { }
fig.11-g08e
FWD: This advances the location for entering a character.
Pressing the dial advances the entry location by one.
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings)
BACK: This moves back the location for entering a character.
Pressing the dial moves back the entry location by one.
INS: This inserts a space. Pressing the dial inserts a single
space.
DEL: This deletes a character. Pressing the dial deletes a
single character.
END: To finish the process.
5. To finish the save process, then in step 4, turn the
SELECT dial to choose End, then press the dial.
fig.11-g10e
6. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
7. Press the MODE button.
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
*
While making the settings, you can go back to the previous
entry location (highlighted) by pressing the PAUSE (BACK)
button.
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings)
fig.11-09e
Creating Combinations of
Actual phrase A0001
Phrases (Phrase Combination)
Thank you for coming
You can create new phrases by combining a number of
phrases already recorded and storing the result as a different
combinations: pattern phrases and song phrases.
Actual phrase A0002
Today
Actual phrase A0003
Despite the bad weather
To check phrases during various settings, you can play back
and stop phrases using the PLAY and STOP buttons (audio
phrases or MIDI phrases). Note that you cannot change
settings during phrase playback. → (p. 54)
Pattern Phrase A0004
A0001 A0002
If a card in AR-2000 format is inserted in either slot A or B (or
both), the AR-3000R can be used only for playback, and it is
not possible to record phrases or make any settings (except
for card conversion). Also, if you insert a card in AR-2000
format into slot A or B (or both) while making settings
(except for card conversion), operation will halt with an error
message, and cannot be resumed until such cards are
removed. To record or edit cards in AR-2000 format on the
AR-3000R, follow the steps in “Card Convert” (p. 78).
Pattern Phrase A0005
A0001 A0002 A0003
: Single Phrase
: Pattern Phrase
A0004: “Thank you for coming today” (for sunny days)
A0005: “Thank you for coming today, despite the bad
weather.” (for rainy days)
Set A0004 or A0005 to start on playback.
Combinations of Phrase Units
(Pattern Phrases)
You can combine a number of phrases to create a new phrase
(pattern phrase). A pattern phrase is a stored combination of
phrases that have already been recorded. A pattern phrase is
also treated as a single phrase.
Phrases 0001 through 0005 are used, but the phrases actually
● You can assign up to 100 phrases to a single pattern phrase.
● You can set the phrase playback sequence (pattern phrase
mode) to SEQ or to RANDOM 1, 2, or 3.
Creating pattern phrases makes it possible to create and start
a variety of combined-phrase patterns while saving card
memory space.
About Pattern Phrase Playback Methods (Pattern Phrase
Modes) → p. 63
●
The playback volume level for phrases is set at 100% of the
Specific Examples
volume level when recorded. (The overall volume level for
each pattern phrase is set with phrase information 1.1 Play
Volume.)
First, make actual recordings of three phrases like the ones
described below.
A0001: “Thank you for coming”
A0002: “Today”
*
This setting cannot be made for MIDI phrases.
●
The interval sets the time between playback of one phrase
A0003: “Despite the bad weather”
Combine these three to create a pattern phrase.
and the next phrase.
fig.11-10e
Pattern Phrase A0010
A0007
A0009
A0008
A0006
Volume (%) Interval (time)
Playback volume for the entire pattern phrase (A0010)
(Phrase Information 1.1 Play Volume)
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings)
●
You can assign a phrase any number of times to a single
pattern phrase, or to more than one pattern phrase.
You can assign pattern phrases that have already been
About Pattern Phrase Playback Methods
(Pattern Phrase Modes)
●
There are four types of pattern-phrase playback methods
(pattern phrase modes), which are described below. Choose
the one that matches your usage conditions.
created to other pattern phrases.
fig.11-11e
Pattern Phrase A0025
SEQ: This plays back the phrases in the sequence in which
they were assigned.
A0017 A0018
A0019 A0020 A0021
A0011
A0013
A0015 A0016
RANDOM1: This plays back the phrases assigned to No. 001
through No. 100 at random.
Pattern Phrase
A0012
Pattern Phrase
A0014
RANDOM2: This plays back the phrases assigned to No. 001
through No. 100 at random, while allowing you to insert
another phrase once at a set number of times (interrupt
phrase interval of 1 to 25). The interrupt phrase is selected
: Single Phrase
: Pattern Phrase
*
When a hierarchy of two or more levels of pattern phrases is
assigned, playback may not be correct.
sequentially from phrases No. 101 through 128.
RANDOM3: This plays back the phrases assigned to No. 001
through No. 100 at random, while allowing you to insert
another phrase once at a set number of times (interrupt
phrase interval of 1 to 25). The interrupt phrase is selected
randomly from phrases No. 101 through 128.
fig.11-11ae
Pattern Phrase A0025
A0017 A0018
A0019 A0020
A0011
A0013
A0015 A0016
A0017 A0018
Pattern Phrase
A0012
Pattern Phrase
A0014
fig.11-12e
Pattern Phrase
A0019
: Single Phrase
: Pattern Phrase
SEQ
No.001–No.100
Playback in stored sequence
●
●
You can also assign MIDI phrases to pattern phrases.
You can assign a mixture of audio phrases and MIDI
RANDOM1
phrases.
No.001–No.100
●
Song phrases that have already been created (p. 65) cannot
Random playback
be assigned to pattern phrases.
RANDOM2
“Playback Volume“, “Playback Point” and “Fade settings”
included in the phrase information for phrases assigned to a
pattern phrase remain in effect, but other phrase information
is disregarded. Because the volume level set for a phrase
alone is disregarded, to adjust the volume, adjust the volume
setting for the pattern phrase.
No.001–No.100
No.101–No.128
in stored sequence
Random playback
Interrupted once per specified number of times
RANDOM3
No.001–No.100
Random playback
No.101–No.128
in random
• When you are creating a pattern phrase, you can choose
actual phrases from both card A and card B, but note
that the pattern phrase is not played back correctly if the
card containing the constituent phrase is not inserted at
the time of playback. (If a constituent phrase does not
exist, the unit seeks and plays back the next phrase.)
Interrupted once per specified number of times
*
With random playback, once a phrase has been played back it is
not chosen again.
Procedure for Creating a Pattern Phrase
1. Press the MODE button.
The MODE indicator lights up.
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “2.1 Pattern Phrase,” then
press the dial.
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings)
3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card containing an
empty phrase for creating a new pattern phrase or the
pattern phrase whose settings you want to change, then
press the dial.
playback volume level.
fig.11-g15e
Turn the SELECT dial to set the interval for the assigned
phrase (from 00.0 to 59.9 sec), then press the dial.
4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the empty phrase for
creating a new pattern phrase or the pattern phrase
whose settings you want to change, then press the dial.
11.Repeat steps 7 through 10 to assign phrases.
*
Only phrases that can be executed are displayed.
• The screen displays the total time for the pattern phrase.
fig.11-g16e
5. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the pattern phrase mode
(SEQ, RANDOM1, RANDOM2, or RANDOM3), then
press the dial.
fig.11-g11e
*
*
If “-----” is assigned at a number, the interval time for the
previous assigned phrase is not added to the total time.
The playback time of MIDI phrases is not added to the total
time.
*
The interrupt phrase interval described below can be set only
when you have selected RANDOM2 or RANDOM3. If you
selected SEQ or RANDOM1, proceed to step 7.
12.To cancel the save process, then in step 7, turn the
SELECT dial to choose END, then press the dial.
fig.11-g17e
6. Turn the SELECT dial to set the interrupt phrase interval
(from 1 to 25), then press the dial.
fig.11-g12e
13.When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
7. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the playback sequence,
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
then press the dial.
fig.11-g13e
Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
14.Press the MODE button.
• If you selected SEQ or RANDOM1, assign phrases in
playback order No. 001 through No. 100.
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
• If you selected RANDOM2 or RANDOM3, assign
phrases in playback order No. 001 through No. 100, and
also assign interrupt phrases to No. 101 through No. 128.
*
While making the settings, you can go back to the previous
entry location (highlighted) by pressing the PAUSE (BACK)
button.
END: To finish making settings.
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
8. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card containing the
phrase you want to store, then press the dial.
fig.11-g14e
9. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the phrase to assign,
then press the dial.
*
*
Only assignable phrases are displayed.
With narrations that use pattern phrases, the proper
treatment of silent portions is important in order to make the
narration sound more natural and easier to understand.
If phrases are assigned in the playback order you selected in
step 7, then selecting “-----” cancels the phrase assignment.
10.Turn the SELECT dial to set the playback volume for the
This issue can be addressed as follows:
assigned phrase (from 10% to 100%), then press the dial.
• Adjust the interval for the pattern phrase.
• Use trigger recording (p. 48) to avoid recording silent
*
If the assigned phrase is a MIDI phrase, you cannot set the
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings)
portions.
• Use the playback point phrase settings (p. 55), and the
When you are creating a song phrase, you can choose actual
phrase-editing “Truncate feature (p. 67) to delete silent
portions that might be perceived as being odd.
phrases from both card A and card B, but note that the
pattern phrase is not played back correctly if the card
containing the constituent phrase is not inserted at the time
of playback. (If a constituent phrase does not exist, silence is
heard until the start point [time] for the next phrase is
reached.)
Time-based Combinations (Song
Phrases)
You can paste together a number of phrases in temporal
(time-flow) order to create a new phrase (song phrase).
A song phrase is a stored combination of phrases that have
already been recorded. A song phrase is also treated as a
single phrase.
Conditions for Creating Song Phrases
• Song phrases that have already been created cannot be
assigned to a song phrase.
By creating song phrases, you can create time-based phrases,
while saving card memory space.
• Pattern phrases that have already been created cannot be
assigned to a song phrase.
Specific Examples
• MIDI phrases cannot be assigned to a song phrase.
Try setting the time frame for playback at 15 minutes.
Prepare phrases like the ones described below.
A0030: A 5-minute song
Procedure for Creating a Song Phrase
1. Press the MODE button.
A0031: A 3-minute song
The MODE indicator lights up.
A0032: A 30-second announcement
A0033: A 15-second announcement
A0034: A 6-minute song
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “2.2 Song Phrase,” then
press the dial.
3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card containing an
empty phrase for creating a new song phrase or the song
phrase whose settings you want to change, then press the
dial.
Paste these phrases on a time axis to create song phrase
A0035 having a total time of 15 minutes.
fig.11-13e
Song Phrase
A0035
*
If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry
location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number.
A0033 A0030 A0032 A0031
A0034
4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the empty phrase for
creating a new song phrase or the song phrase whose
settings you want to change, then press the dial.
* 1
15 minutes
: Start point of phrase (time)
*
Only phrases that can be executed are displayed.
5. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the assignment number
: End point of song phrase (time)
(from No. 001 to No. 100), then press the dial.
*1 If the start point (time) for phrase A0034 is set at a time
fig.11-g18e
that overlaps with phrase A0031, playback of A0031 is
interrupted and playback of A0034 starts.
• You can assign up to 100 phrases to a single song phrase.
END: To finish making settings.
• You can assign a phrase any number of times to a single
song phrase, or to more than one song phrase.
6. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card containing the
phrase you want to store, then press the dial.
fig.11-g19e
Playback points and fade settings included in the phrase
information for phrases assigned to a song phrase remain in
effect, but other phrase information is disregarded. Note that
a phrase is assigned to a song phrase in the same state as
when it was just recorded (that is, the state before phrase-
information settings are made).
*
If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry
location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number.
Turn the SELECT dial to choose the phrase you want to store,
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings)
then press the dial.
*
Only assignable phrases are displayed.
-----:If a phrase is assigned at the assignment number you
selected in step 5, then this cancels the phrase assignment.
(However, even after the assignment is canceled, point
information is retained.)
STOP: Select this when you want to specify an ending point
(time) for the song phrase. (In the specific example on p. 65,
this is set at 15 minutes in step 7.)
assigned phrase, then press the dial.
fig.11-g20e
If you selected Stop in step 6, then set the end point (time) for
the song phrase and press the dial. (In the specific example
on p. 65, this is set at 00 h 15 m 00 s 00 f 0 sf.)
8. Repeat steps 5 through 7 to assign phrases.
• The screen displays the total time for the song phrase.
fig.11-g21e
Total Time
9. To cancel the save process, then in step 5, turn the
SELECT dial to choose END, then press the dial.
10.When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
11.Press the MODE button.
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
*
While making the settings, you can go back to the previous
entry location (highlighted) by pressing the PAUSE (BACK)
button.
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings)
fig.11-g22e
Modifying Phrases Themselves
(Phrase Edit)
This is used to modify (edit) recorded phrases.
*
If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry
location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number.
For settings when a card is formatted, refer to p. 135.
Turn the SELECT dial to choose the beginning phrase to
delete, then press the dial.
*
Only phrases that can be executed are displayed.
To confirm phrases when making settings, you can use the
PLAY and STOP buttons to play and stop phrases and the
PAUSE button to pause phrases (audio phrases only), and
the SELECT dial to move the playback location forward and
Turn the SELECT dial to choose the final phrase to delete,
then press the dial.
fig.11-g23e
settings during phrase playback.
*
*
Only phrases that can be executed are displayed.
To delete a single phrase, choose the same phrase for the
beginning phrase and the final phrase.
• Items that can be set differ according to the type of
phrase (audio phrase, MIDI phrase, pattern phrase, or
song phrase). Also refer to the Phrase Information/
Phrase Setting Correspondence Table (p. 75).
• When editing a phrase, you cannot overwrite a phrase
itself except by using the phrase delete or truncate
functions. Make sure there is enough free space to carry
out phrase editing.
4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
• If a card in AR-2000 format is inserted in either slot A or
B (or both), the AR-3000R can be used only for playback,
settings (except for card conversion). Also, if you insert a
card in AR-2000 format into slot A or B (or both) while
making settings (except for card conversion), operation
will halt with an error message, and cannot be resumed
until such cards are removed. To record or edit cards in
AR-2000 format on the AR-3000R, follow the steps in
“Card Convert” (p. 78).
5. Press the MODE button.
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
*
While making the settings, you can go back to the previous
entry location (highlighted) by pressing the PAUSE (BACK)
button.
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
discarded.
• When the phrase editing described below is carried out,
the Phrase Information is not updated.
Phrase Divide
Phrase Combine
Phrase Convert
Time Stretch
Deleting Audio Outside the
Playback Points (Phrase
Truncate)
Deleting a Phrase (Phrase Delete)
This deletes a phrase. You can also delete a continuous group
of phrases in a batch.
This deletes data outside the points set with the Playback
Point phrase information (p. 55). You can also truncate a
Procedure for Deleting a Phrase
continuous group of phrases in a batch.
fig.11-17e
1. Press the MODE button.
Playback passage
The MODE indicator lights up.
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “3.1 Phrase Delete,” then
Phrase
press the dial.
Start
End
3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card containing the
beginning phrase you want to delete, then press the dial.
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings)
Copying a Phrase (Phrase Copy)
This copies a phrase. You can also copy a continuous group
of phrases in a batch.
Truncate acts upon and modifies the selected phrase itself.
Care must be taken, since once it has been executed, the
phrase cannot be restored to its original state.
Important Notes About Copying a Continuous Group of
Phrases in a Batch
You cannot make these settings for MODE2 phrases.
Example: Copying a continuous range of phrases from
Phrase Truncate Procedure
A0050 to A0053
If A0052 happens to be a used empty phrase, then specify a
continuous group of three empty phrases as the beginning.
1. Press the MODE button.
The MODE indicator lights up.
(The system seeks and displays only writable phrases.)
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “3.2 Phrase Truncate,”
fig.11-14e
then press the dial.
A0050
A0051
Copy range
3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card containing the
A0052 empty
beginning phrase for truncation, then press the dial.
fig.11-g26e
A0053
Phrase Copy
*
If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry
location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number.
A0060
A0061
A0062
Turn the SELECT dial to choose the beginning phrase for
truncation, then press the dial.
*
Only phrases that can be executed are displayed.
Turn the SELECT dial to choose the final phrase for
truncation, then press the dial.
Three continuous empty phrases at the write destination
*
*
Only phrases that can be executed are displayed.
Important Notes About Copying Pattern Phrases or Song
Phrases
To truncate a single phrase, choose the same phrase for the
beginning phrase and the final phrase.
For pattern phrases and song phrases, only the combination
information is copied. Note that the actual constituent
phrases are not copied.
4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
Example:
● When a pattern phrase or song phrase on the same card is
Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
copied
→ The actual constituent phrases exist, so playback is correct.
fig.11-15e
5. Press the MODE button.
Pattern Phrase
Song Phrase
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
A0012
A0015
A0016
*
While making the settings, you can go back to the previous
entry location (highlighted) by pressing the PAUSE (BACK)
button.
constituent phrases
A0017
Phrase Copy
A0018
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
A0019
A0030
● When a pattern phrase or song phrase is copied between
different cards (A → B)
→ Playback is correct while card A is inserted in the slot (and
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings)
the actual phrases are present), but if card A is removed or
card B is inserted into slot A, the actual constituent phrases
are no longer present, and so playback is not correct. To
ensure that a pattern phrase or song pattern copied to a
different card (A → B) is played back correctly, copy the
actual constituent phrases separately to card B.
*
Only phrases that can be executed are displayed.
5. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
In such cases, with regard to the constituent phrases of the
pattern phrases and song phrases, the actual phrases should
be reregistered after the copying is complete.
6. Press the MODE button.
fig.11-16e
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
Pattern Phrase
Song Phrase
*
While making the settings, you can go back to the previous
entry location (highlighted) by pressing the PAUSE (BACK)
button.
Phrase Copy
B0001
A0012
A0015
A0016
A0017
A0018
A0019
constituent phrases
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
Procedure for Copying a Phrase
1. Press the MODE button.
Dividing a Phrase (Phrase Divide)
The MODE indicator lights up.
This splits a phrase at the location you specify, creating two
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “3.3 Phrase Copy,” then
phrases.
press the dial.
fig.11-19e
Deviding point
3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card containing the
beginning phrase of the copy source, then press the dial.
fig.11-g24e
Phrase 1
Two phrases
*
If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry
location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number.
Phrase 2
Phrase 3
Turn the SELECT dial to choose the beginning phrase at the
copy source, then press the dial.
You cannot make these settings for MODE2 phrases.
*
Only phrases that can be executed are displayed.
Procedure for Dividing a Phrase
Turn the SELECT dial to choose the final phrase of the copy
source, then press the dial.
1. Press the MODE button.
The MODE indicator lights up.
*
*
Only phrases that can be executed are displayed.
To copy a single phrase, choose the same phrase for the
beginning phrase and the final phrase.
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “3.4 Phrase Divide,” then
press the dial.
4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the write-destination
3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card containing the
card, then press the dial.
phrase you want to split, then press the dial.
fig.11-g25e
fig.11-g28e
*
If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry
location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number.
*
If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry
location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number.
Turn the SELECT dial to choose the phrase to split, then
press the dial.
Turn the SELECT dial to choose the beginning phrase for the
write destination, then press the dial.
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings)
*
Only phrases that can be executed are displayed.
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
4. Turn the SELECT dial to set the split point (time), then
press the dial.
fig.11-g29e
Joining Phrases (Phrase
Combine)
This joins two phrases, creating a single phrase.
fig.11-20e (Phrase Join)
You can set the points while listening to the audio by using
the SCRUB playback mode (p. 54). Also, you can use TO (to
split point) and FROM (from split point) to listen to audio for
a fixed time before and after the split point.
Src 1
Src 2
Phrase1
Phrase 2
One phrase
5. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card for write
Phrase 3
destination 1, then press the dial.
fig.11-g30e
*
Phrase Combine cannot be executed unless the RDAC-Grade,
RDAC-Mode, and recording type are the same for both
phrases.
Destination 1
Destination 2
*
If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry
location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number.
You cannot make these settings for MODE2 phrases.
Turn the SELECT dial to choose the phrase for write
destination 1, then press the dial.
Procedure for Joining Phrases
1. Press the MODE button.
*
Only phrases that can be executed are displayed.
The MODE indicator lights up.
6. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card for write
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “3.5 Phrase Combine,”
destination 2, then press the dial.
fig.11-g31e
then press the dial.
3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card containing the
first phrase to join (Src1), then press the dial.
fig.11-g32e
*
If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry
location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number.
Turn the SELECT dial to choose the phrase for write
destination 2, then press the dial.
*
If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry
location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number.
*
Only phrases that can be executed are displayed.
Turn the SELECT dial to choose the first phrase to join (Src1),
then press the dial.
7. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
*
Only phrases that can be executed are displayed.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card containing the
second phrase to join (Src2), then press the dial.
Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
fig.11-g33e
8. Press the MODE button.
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
*
If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry
location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number.
*
While making the settings, you can go back to the previous
entry location (highlighted) by pressing the PAUSE (BACK)
button.
Turn the SELECT dial to choose the second phrase to join
(Src2), then press the dial.
*
Only phrases that can be executed are displayed.
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings)
5. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the write-destination
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “3.6 Time Stretch,” then
card, then press the dial.
press the dial.
fig.11-g34e
3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card containing the
phrase whose time you want to stretch, then press the
dial.
fig.11-g37e
*
If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry
location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number.
Turn the SELECT dial to choose the write-destination phrase,
then press the dial.
*
If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry
location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number.
*
Only phrases that can be executed are displayed.
Turn the SELECT dial to choose the phrase whose time you
want to stretch, then press the dial.
6. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
*
Only phrases that can be executed are displayed.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
4. Turn the SELECT dial to set the degree of stretching
Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
(from -20.0% to +20.0%), then press the dial.
fig.11-g38e
Original playback time
7. Press the MODE button.
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
Playback time after stretching
*
While making the settings, you can go back to the previous
entry location (highlighted) by pressing the PAUSE (BACK)
button.
5. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the write-destination
card, then press the dial.
fig.11-g39e
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
*
Only executable cards are displayed.
Turn the SELECT dial to choose the write-destination phrase,
then press the dial.
*
Only phrases that can be executed are displayed.
Expanding or Compressing the
Playback Time Without Changing
the Pitch (Time Stretch)
6. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
This expands or compresses a phrase’s playback time without
changing its pitch. You can set a value within a range of -
20.0% to +20.0% of the phrase’s original playback time.
Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
*
The playback time after stretching is displayed simultaneously.
7. Press the MODE button.
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
The displayed playback time after stretching is only a rough
guide, and may not match the actual playback time after
conversion.
*
While making the settings, you can go back to the previous
entry location (highlighted) by pressing the PAUSE (BACK)
button.
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
You cannot make these settings for MODE2 phrases.
Time Stretch Procedure
1. Press the MODE button.
The MODE indicator lights up.
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings)
• When conducting multiple-unit simultaneous playback
Converting a Phrase’s Recording
Settings (Phrase Convert)
This converts the recording-setting items RDAC-Mode and
recording type to other settings while leaving phrase content
unchanged.
with AR-LINK (p. 123) (With AR-LINK playback,
simultaneous playback is not possible unless the phrases
are of the same recording type.)
<Conversion of a single stereo phrase to a single mono
phrase: STEREO → MONO>
fig.11-22e
RDAC-Mode (Signal Processing
Format)
Stereo Phrase
Phrase 1
Mono Phrase
Phrase 2
One phrase
• H-LINEAR: 24-bit PCM recording
You can also convert the recording type in the same way.
<Conversion of a single stereo phrase to two mono phrases:
• LINEAR: 16-bit PCM recording
STEREO → MONO 1, 2>
• MODE3: Approximately 2.5 times the recording time
fig.11-23e
available with LINEAR
Mono Phrase
(L ch of Phrase 1)
• MODE2: Approximately 2.5 times the recording time
available with LINEAR, or longer
Phrase 2
Stereo Phrase
• MODE1: Approximately 4 times the recording time
Two phrases
available with LINEAR
Phrase 1
Mono Phrase
(R ch of Phrase 1)
Phrase 3
The RDAC mode is converted at times like these.
<Conversion of two mono phrases to a single stereo phrase:
MONO 1, 2 → STEREO>
• When conducting Dual Mono mode (p. 120) two-channel
simultaneous playback (In the Dual Mono mode,
simultaneous playback is not possible unless the phrases
are uniformly RDAC-Mode.)
fig.11-24e
Mono Phrase
Phrase 1
Stereo Phrase
One phrase
Phrase 3
• When conducting multiple-unit simultaneous playback
with AR-LINK (p. 123) (With AR-LINK playback,
simultaneous playback is not possible unless the phrases
are uniformly RDAC-Mode.)
Mono Phrase
L ch: Phrase 1
R ch: Phrase 2
Phrase 2
• When phrases recorded with H-LINEAR or MODE3 on
the AR-3000R are used on the AR-2000 or the like (H-
LINEAR and MODE3 phrases cannot be used
unchanged on the AR-2000.)
Procedure for Phrase Convert
● Converting the RDAC-Mode
1. Press the MODE button.
The MODE indicator lights up.
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “3.7 Phrase Convert,”
Please be aware that conversion to a higher level does not
enhance the sound quality.
then press the dial.
3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose RDAC-Mode, then press
Recording Type
the dial.
fig.11-g44e
• STEREO
• MONO
4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose RDAC-Mode type (H-
LINEAR/LINEAR/MODE3/MODE2/MODE1), then
The recording type is converted at times like these.
press the dial.
• When conducting two-channel simultaneous playback in
the Dual Mono mode (p. 123)(In the Dual Mono mode,
simultaneous playback is not possible unless the phrases
are mono.)
fig.11-g44e
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings)
5. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card containing the
beginning phrase you want to convert, then press the
dial.
Even if there are phrases in “Phrase range” that have the
same RDAC-Mode as the set RDAC-Mode, it is written
unchanged as a new phrase.
fig.11-g45e
● Converting the Recording Type
*
If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry
location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number.
1. Press the MODE button.
The MODE indicator lights up.
Turn the SELECT dial to choose the beginning phrase to
convert, then press the dial.
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “3.7 Phrase Convert,”
then press the dial.
*
Only phrases that can be executed are displayed.
3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the recording type, then
Turn the SELECT dial to choose the final phrase to convert,
then press the dial.
press the dial.
fig.11-g47ae
*
*
Only phrases that can be executed are displayed.
To convert a single phrase, choose the same phrase for the
beginning phrase and the final phrase.
4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the recording-type
conversion method (STEREO → MONO, STEREO →
MONO 1, 2, or MONO 1, 2 → STEREO), then press the
6. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the write-destination
card, then press the dial.
fig.11-g46e
dial.
fig.11-g48e
*
If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry
location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number.
When “STEREO → MONO” Is Selected
Turn the SELECT dial to choose the beginning phrase for the
5. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card containing the
write destination, then press the dial.
beginning phrase you want to convert, then press the
fig.11-g47e
dial.
fig.11-g49e
*
Only phrases that can be executed are displayed.
7. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
*
If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry
location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number.
ENTER button to enable the settings.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
Turn the SELECT dial to choose the beginning phrase to
convert, then press the dial.
Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
*
Only phrases that can be executed are displayed.
Turn the SELECT dial to choose the final phrase to convert,
then press the dial.
8. Press the MODE button.
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
*
*
Only phrases that can be executed are displayed.
To convert a single phrase, choose the same phrase for the
beginning phrase and the final phrase.
*
While making the settings, you can go back to the previous
entry location (highlighted) by pressing the PAUSE (BACK)
button.
6. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the write-destination
card, then press the dial.
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
fig.11-g50e
*
If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry
location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number.
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings)
7. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the beginning phrase for
8. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
the write destination, then press the dial.
ENTER button to enable the settings.
fig.11-g51e
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
*
Only phrases that can be executed are displayed.
9. Press the MODE button.
8. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
● When “MONO 1, 2 → STEREO” Is Selected
Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
5. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card containing the
first mono phrase 1 (MONO1) you want to convert, then
press the dial.
9. Press the MODE button.
fig.11-g55e
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
● When “STEREO → MONO 1, 2” Is Selected
*
If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry
location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number.
5. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card containing the
stereo phrase you want to convert, then press the dial.
fig.11-g52e
Turn the SELECT dial to choose the first mono phrase 1 to
convert, then press the dial.
*
Only phrases that can be executed are displayed.
*
If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry
location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number.
6. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card containing the
second mono phrase 2 (MONO2) you want to convert,
then press the dial.
Turn the SELECT dial to choose the stereo phrase to convert,
then press the dial.
fig.11-g56e
*
Only phrases that can be executed are displayed.
6. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card for write
*
If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry
location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number.
destination 1 (MONO1), then press the dial.
fig.11-g53e
Turn the SELECT dial to choose the second mono phrase 2 to
convert, then press the dial.
*
Only phrases that can be executed are displayed.
*
If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry
location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number.
7. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the write-destination
card, then press the dial.
Turn the SELECT dial to choose the phrase for write
destination 1, then press the dial.
fig.11-g57e
*
Only phrases that can be executed are displayed.
7. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card for write
*
If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry
location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number.
destination 2 (MONO2), then press the dial.
fig.11-g54e
Turn the SELECT dial to choose the write-destination phrase,
then press the dial.
*
Only phrases that can be executed are displayed.
*
If a card is inserted into either slot A or slot B, the entry
location (highlighted) advances to the phrase number.
8. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
Turn the SELECT dial to choose the phrase for write
destination 2, then press the dial.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
*
Only phrases that can be executed are displayed.
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Modifying Recorded Phrases (Phrase Settings)
Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
9. Press the MODE button.
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
*
While making the settings, you can go back to the previous
entry location (highlighted) by pressing the PAUSE (BACK)
button.
*
When two monaural phrases of differing grades are converted
to stereo, the playback pitch in one of the channels may change.
Phrase Information/Phrase
Setting Correspondence Table
fig.11-25e
O : Can be set
X : Not set
Phrases
Dual Mono
AR-LINK
Audio
RDAC-Mode: RDAC-Mode:
Phrase Settings
Mode (ON)
Playback
MIDI
Pattern
Song
MODE2
except MODE2
*2
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
X
O
X
X
O
O
O
O
O
X
●1.1 Play Volume
●1.2 Delay Time
●1.3 Playback Point
●1.4 Repeat Play
●1.5 Loop Play
●1.6 Fade
O
X
O
X
O
X
X
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
X
X
O
X
O
O
O
X
O
X
X
O
X
O
1 Phrase
Information
*2
*2
O
O
O
X
O
O
*2
O
O
X
O
X
O
●1.7 Control Out
●1.8 MIDI Tempo
●1.9 Phrase Name
O
X
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
X
X
X
O
●3.1 Phrase Delete
●3.2 Phrase Truncate
●3.3 Phrase Copy
●3.4 Phrase Divide
●3.5 Phrase Combine
●3.6 Time Stretch
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
X
X
X
X
O
X
O
X
3 Phrase Edit
*1
*1
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
●3.7 Phrase Convert
*1 The actual constituent phrases are not copied.
*2 The AR-LINK slave operates in accord with the data from the master.
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Making Settings and Edits for
Individual Cards
You can make batch settings and edits for individual cards.
4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
If a card in AR-2000 format is inserted in either slot A or B (or
both), the AR-3000R can be used only for playback, and it is
for card conversion). Also, if you insert a card in AR-2000
format into slot A or B (or both) while making settings
(except for card conversion), note that the operation halts
with an error message, and the operation cannot be resumed
until the card or card is removed. To record or edit cards in
AR-2000 format on the AR-3000R, follow the steps in “Card
Convert” (p. 78).
When the operation ends, the display returns to the setting
item selection screen.
5. Press the MODE button.
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
*
Pressing the MODE button while making the setting displays
a prompt asking you whether you want to quit making the
setting. Note that choosing “YES” and pressing the ENTER
button returns you to the usual screen, discarding any
settings made up to that point.
Making a Card Usable on the AR-
3000R (Card Format)
Copying a Card (Card Copy)
When you use a new card or a card used previously on a
This copies the data on the card in slot A to the card in slot B.
device other than the unit, you must first format the card.
Card A and card B don’t have to be the same size (capacity),
but unless the usable space on card B is larger than the space
used on card A, you cannot copy everything on card A to
card B.
For an explanation of how to format the card, refer to
“Formatting a Card” (p. 31).
Performing formatting erases all data on the card. Before you
format the card, make sure it contains no data you don’t
want to lose.
Please be aware that performing a “Card Copy” operation
Deleting All Phrases on a Card
(Card Delete)
A card in AR-2000 format cannot be copied as-is. To copy a
card in AR-2000 format, use Card Convert to convert it to
AR-3000 format, then copy the card.
This deletes all the phrases on a card.
Card Convert → p. 78
Please be aware that performing a Card Delete operation
deletes all phrase data. (This returns the card to the state it
was in when freshly formatted.)
Card Copy Procedure
1. Press the MODE button.
Card Delete Procedure
The MODE indicator lights up.
1. Press the MODE button.
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “4.3 Card Copy (A→B),”
The MODE indicator lights up.
then press the dial.
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “4.2 Card Delete,” then
3. Insert the card to copy from into slot A and the card to
press the dial.
copy to into slot B, then press the SELECT dial.
3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card to delete (A or
*
Be sure to insert the cards into the correct slots.
B), then press the dial.
4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
fig.12-g01e
ENTER button to enable the settings.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
When the operation ends, the display returns to the setting
item selection screen.
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Making Settings and Edits for Individual Cards
5. Press the MODE button.
Protecting a Card (Card Protect)
This prohibits such card operations as saving, overwriting,
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
deleting, and editing. (However, playback and copying
*
Pressing the MODE button while making the setting displays
phrases to another card are still possible.)
a prompt asking you whether you want to quit making the
setting. Note that choosing “YES” and pressing the ENTER
button returns you to the usual screen, discarding any
settings made up to that point.
Procedure for Making the Card Protect Setting
1. Press the MODE button.
The MODE indicator lights up.
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “4.5 Card Protect,” then
Copying Just the Settings (Setting
Copy)
press the dial.
3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card you want to
This copies the following setting information stored on the
protect (A or B), then press the dial.
fig.12-g02e
card in slot A to the card in slot B.
• Control input settings
• MIDI settings
• RS-232C settings
• AR-LINK settings
• System settings
4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose Card Protect (OFF or
ON), then press the dial.
5. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
You cannot copy settings to a card that has a different format
(that is, you cannot copy settings from a card in AR-2000
format to a card in AR-3000 format, or vice versa).
When you’re finished making the setting, the display returns
to the setting item selection screen.
Setting Copy Procedure
6. Press the MODE button.
1. Press the MODE button.
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
The MODE indicator lights up.
*
While making the settings, you can go back to the previous
entry position (highlighted) by using the PAUSE (BACK)
button.
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “4.4 Setting Copy
(A→B),” then press the dial.
3. Insert the card to copy from into slot A and the card to
*
Pressing the MODE button while making the setting displays
a prompt asking you whether you want to quit making the
setting. Note that choosing “YES” and pressing the ENTER
settings made up to that point.
copy to into slot B, then press the SELECT dial.
*
Be sure to insert the cards into the correct slots.
4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
Changing the Name of a Card
(Card Name)
When the operation ends, the display returns to the setting
item selection screen.
This changes the name assigned to a card when it was
5. Press the MODE button.
formatted (p. 31).
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
When you record a phrase, this card name is automatically
added to the beginning of the phrase name. You can enter a
card name of up to eight characters.
*
Pressing the MODE button while making the setting displays
a prompt asking you whether you want to quit making the
setting. Note that choosing “YES” and pressing the ENTER
button returns you to the usual screen, discarding any
settings made up to that point.
Example:
Card name before change: MESSAGE
→ Phrase name: MESSAGE 1
Card name after change: ENTRANCE
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Making Settings and Edits for Individual Cards
If you record a new phrase 0002 after changing the card
name, it is given “ENTRANCE 2” as the phrase name.
*
*
While making the settings, you can go back to the previous
entry position (highlighted) by using the PAUSE (BACK)
button.
*
The name of phrase 0001, which was recorded before changing
the card name, remains unchanged (“MESSAGE 1”).
Pressing the MODE button while making the setting displays
a prompt asking you whether you want to quit making the
setting. Note that choosing “YES” and pressing the ENTER
button returns you to the usual screen, discarding any
settings made up to that point.
*
In a phrase name, the number after the card name indicates the
phrase number.
Procedure for Changing the Card Name
1. Press the MODE button.
The MODE indicator lights up.
Making Cards for Legacy Models
Usable on the AR-3000R (Card
Convert)
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “4.6 Card Name,” then
press the dial.
3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card whose name
■ What Is Card Convert?
you want to change (A or B), then press the dial.
With the AR-3000R, you can play back cards in AR-2000
format (from models AR-2000/100) without having to make
any changes, but you cannot edit or change settings (write or
rewrite) on such cards.
4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose a character. Press the
dial to confirm the selected character.
fig.12-g03e
Also, the legacy models AR-2000/100 can play back cards in
AR-3000 format without having to make any changes, but
cannot be used to edit or change settings (write or rewrite) on
such cards.
• Characters you can use: Letters of the alphabet
(uppercase) space numerals - ! # $ % & ‘ ( ) @ ^ _ { }
“Card Convert” is a feature that lets you take a card in AR-
2000 format and play it back, change settings, and edit (write
or overwrite) it with the AR-3000R, or vice versa.
• FWD: This advances the location for entering a
character. Pressing the dial advances the entry location
by one.
• BACK: This moves back the location for entering a
character. Pressing the dial moves back the entry
location by one.
Card Compatibility with Other Models in the AR Series → p.
34
■ Conversion of New Functions on the AR-3000R
• INS: This inserts a space. Pressing the dial inserts a
single space.
When you convert a card in AR-3000 format to a card in AR-
2000 format, the AR-3000R setting items are converted as
shown in the “Card Conversion Chart” (p. 80).
• DEL: This deletes a character. Pressing the dial deletes a
single character.
On legacy models such as the AR-2000, items set on the AR-
3000R are grouped into the following four types.
• END: This finishes the setting process.
5. To quit saving, turn the SELECT dial to choose “END” in
• Effective without change
• Converted to similar values
• Not valid
step 3, then press the dial.
fig.12-g04e
• Result in an error and halt conversion
6. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
• Cards for which the maximum number of phrases was
set at 1,000 when formatted cannot be converted.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
• The settings for items which are not valid or are
converted to similar values are lost and cannot be
recovered even by formatting the AR-3000R again.
When you’re finished making the setting, the display returns
to the setting item selection screen.
7. Press the MODE button.
Also, for items which result in an error and cause conversion
to stop, it is necessary to perform processing such as phrase
conversion, truncating phrases, and backing up and deleting
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Making Settings and Edits for Individual Cards
to eliminate the cause of the error. (For information on error-
format to AR-3000 format.
causing items and remedies, refer to “Conversion Error List”
(p. 80).)
4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the Card you want to
convert, then press the dial.
fig.12-g06e
• If you are using the AR-3000R to perform recording or
editing on a card used on an AR-2000, we recommend
making settings only for items that remain effective
without change when the card is converted to AR-2000
format.
• A → A: This converts a single card (the card itself).
• A → B: This converts card A (the copy source) to card B
■ Conversion Using a Single Card and Conversion Using
(the copy destination).
Two Cards
*
Be sure to insert the cards into the correct slots.
With Card Convert, in addition to converting a single card
(the card itself), you can perform conversion while copying
one card (the source) to another card (the destination).
5. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
We recommend converting using two cards when you want
to leave what is on the card unconverted. When you perform
conversion using two cards, insert the copy-source card into
slot A and the copy-destination card into slot B.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
When the operation ends, the display returns to the setting
item selection screen.
6. Press the MODE button.
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
When you are converting using two cards, the copy-source
card and the copy-destination card don’t have to be the same
size (capacity), but you can perform Card Convert only when
the usable space on the destination card is larger than the
space used on the source card.
*
While making the settings, you can go back to the previous
entry position (highlighted) by using the PAUSE (BACK)
button.
*
Pressing the MODE button while making the setting displays
a prompt asking you whether you want to quit making the
setting. Note that choosing “YES” and pressing the ENTER
button returns you to the usual screen, discarding any
settings made up to that point.
When you convert data in AR-2000 format to AR-3000
format, the amount of data after conversion increases
slightly. This means that even if you are converting the same
card (conversion using a single card) or two cards that have
the same capacity (conversion using two cards), it may not be
possible to perform conversion if there is no more free space
or if there is little free space remaining. If this happens, then
reduce the amount of data on the copy-source card, such as
by deleting unneeded phrases.
Procedure for Card Convert
1. Press the MODE button.
The MODE indicator lights up.
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “4.7 Card Convert,” then
press the dial.
3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the Convert, then press
the dial.
fig.12-g05e
• AR-3000 → AR-2000: This converts a card in AR-3000
format to AR-2000 format.
• AR-2000 → AR-3000: This converts a card in AR-2000
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Making Settings and Edits for Individual Cards
Card Conversion Chart/Conversion Error Chart
fig.12-01e
Card Conversion (AR-3000→AR-2000)Chart
* This chart shows compatibility for converted cards used on the AR-2000.
When you're using on the AR-100 or AR-1, refer to the owner's manual for
the respective device.
1 Phrase Information
❍ Effective without change
◆ Converted to similar values
✕ Not valid
●1.1 Playback Volume (10%--100%) ❍
●1.2 Delay Time (00s00f–59s29f)
●1.3 Playback Point
●1.4 Repeat Play
OFF
◆ Conversion of frames to seconds
▲ Error when playback point is set
▲ Result in an error and halt conversion
❍
❍
✕
ON
Repeat (1–99)
Repeat Interval (00m00s–59m59s)
❍
State of recording settings
●1.5 Loop Play
●1.6 Fade
●1.7 Control Out
OFF
✕ Disabled
✕ Disabled
●REC-In (Selecting the Recording Connector)
LINE-IN
◆
◆
◆
◆
MIDI Rec: OFF
MIDI Rec: OFF
MIDI Rec: OFF
MIDI Rec: ON
❍
❍
❍
LINE+MIC-IN
DIGITAL-IN
MIDI-IN
ON
Offset Time (00m00s–59m59s)
●1.8 MIDI Playback Tempo (5–260)
●1.9 Phrase Name
❍
●RDAC-Grade
◆ Up to 11 characters
ANNOUNCE
LONG2
LONG1
STANDARD
HIGH
S-HIGH
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
◆
2 Phrase Combination
●2.1 Pattern Phrase
▲ Error when pattern phrase is assigned
to pattern phrase
HIGH
Pattern Phrase Modes
SEQUENTIAL
RANDOM1
RANDOM2
RANDOM3
Interrupt phrase interval (1–25)
Playback sequence (No.001–128)
Assigned phrase (A0001–B1000)
❍
●RDAC-Mode
◆
◆
◆
✕
◆
❍
▲
✕
❍
RANDOM
RANDOM
RANDOM
Disabled
Valid for No. 001 through 100
Valid for No. 001 through 500
Error when 501 or more are present
Disabled
MODE1
MODE2
MODE3
LINEAR
H-LINEAR
❍
❍
◆
◆
◆
MODE2
MODE2
MODE2
●REC Type
STEREO
MONO
Volume (10%–100%)
Interval (00.0s–59.9s)
❍
❍
●2.2 Song phrase
▲ Error when song phrase is present
●Trig Level (Trigger Recording Settings)
OFF
LOW
MID
❍
❍
❍
❍
4 Settings for Card Editing
●4.1 Card Format
Select Max Phrases
HIGH
250
500
1000
❍
❍
▲
●MIDI Time Base
192
240
❍
❍
●4.5 Card Protect
OFF
ON
❍
◆
Recording Phrase Protection
●4.6 Card Name
❍
Recording settings for recorded phrased
●RDAC-Grade
5 Settings for Control Input
ANNOUNCE
LONG2
LONG1
STANDARD
HIGH
S-HIGH
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
▲
●5.1 Control Input Mode
DIRECT PLAY
PROGRAM PLAY
BINARY PLAY
❍
❍
❍
◆
BINARY REC
BINARY1
Normal
●5.2 Direct Play
Normal
First-In
Last-In
●RDAC-Mode
❍
◆
❍
❍
❍
❍
▲
MODE1
MODE2
MODE3
LINEAR
H-LINEAR
❍
❍
▲
❍
▲
Sequence
Phrase assignment (1–16)
Assigned phrase
(PLAY,-----,A0001–B1000)
Valid for No. 001 through 500
Error when 501 or more are present
●REC Type
STEREO
MONO
❍
❍
●5.3 Program Play
Program (1–5)
Played back in order
❍
❍
❍
▲
●MIDI Time Base
192
240
Assigned phrase (A0001–B1000)
Valid for No. 001 through 500
Error when 501 or more are present
❍
❍
●5.4 Binary Play
<Level: Edge>
OFF: OFF
ON: OFF
OFF: ON
◆
❍
❍
◆
Trigger Mode: Level
Trigger Mode: Level
Trigger Mode: Edge
Trigger Mode: Level
ON: ON
●5.5 Binary Recording
Phrase select
BINARY1
✕
✕
Disabled
Disabled
BINARY2
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Making Settings and Edits for Individual Cards
fig.12-02e
Conversion Error Chart
In situations like the ones described below, an error occurs and
conversion stops. Take action as described in the remedy, then
carry out card conversion again.
6 MIDI settings
▲When there is insufficient space on the destination card for conversion
●6.1 MIDI Output (MIDI OUT/THRU)
OUT
THRU
❍
❍
●
If you are carrying out conversion using two cards, the copy-source card
and the copy-destination card do not need to be of the same capacity, but
card conversion is not possible unless the usable space on the destination
card is larger than the used space on the source card.
●6.2 MIDI Note Map
Assigned phrase (A0001–B1000)
❍
▲
✕
Valid for No. 001 through 500
Error when 501 or more are present
Disabled (Always output when MIDI
output is set to OUT)
Action 1: Use a card for the copy destination that has a greater amount of
available space than that used on the card-source card.
●6.3 MIDI Note Out
Action 2: Reduce the space used on the copy-source card, such as by
deleting unneeded phrases.
❍
●6.4 MIDI Channel
●6.5 Note Trigger
Trigger
●When you convert a card in AR-2000 format to AR-3000 format, the
❍
❍
amount of space used after conversion may increase somewhat. Conversion
may not be possible if space is used up or there is little remaining space,
even if conversion uses the same card (for single-card conversion) or cards
of the same capacity (for two-card conversion).
Gate
●6.6 MIDI Rx Message
Note On Velocity
Panpot
✕
✕
✕
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Action: Reduce the space used on the copy-source card, such as by
deleting unneeded phrases.
Expression
●6.7 MIDI Device ID (1–32)
●6.8 MMC Mode
●6.9 MTC
Sync Source
Sync Out
❍
✕ Disabled
(What follows are errors that may occur when converting a card in
AR-3000 format to AR-2000 format.)
✕
✕
✕
✕
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
MTC Type
MTC Error Level
▲When there are phrases recorded using recording settings that
do not exist in AR-2000 format
Phrases with the following recording settings cannot be used in AR-
2000 format.
7 RS-232C settings
●7.1 Baud Rate
4800
9600
19200
38400
• Phrases for which the RDAC grade is S-HIGH
• Phrases for which the RDAC mode is H-LINEAR or MODE3
❍
❍
❍
❍
Action 1:
Carry out phrase-editing phrase convert (p. 72) to convert the
phrase that caused the error to recording settings that can be
used with AR-2000 format.
Action 2: Make a backup on another card, then delete the phrase.
8 AR-LINK settings
●8.1 AR-LINK Mode
✕ Disabled
▲
When there are phrases for which playback points have been set
9 System settings
When there is a phrase for which playback point phrase information (p.
56) has been set, conversion stops.
●9.1 Dual Mono Mode
OFF (STEREO)
ON (Dual MONO)
◆
◆
Channel Mode: OFF
Channel Mode: ON
Action 1: Carry out phrase-editing phrase truncate.
●9.2 Line Thru settings *1
Action 2: Reset the playback points at both ends of the phrase (resulting in
a state in which playback points are not set).
<Line Thru:Thru Volume> AR-2000 System Version 1.03 or earlier
OFF
◆
◆
◆
Line Input Select: OFF
Line Input Select: ON
Line Input Select: ON
Action 3: Make a backup on another card and delete the phrase.
ON: When 0%
ON: When 1%–100%
<Line Thru:Thru Volume> AR-2000 System Version 1.10 or later
▲When there is a pattern phrase to which an already-created
pattern phrase is assigned.
In the AR-2000 format, a pattern phrase to which a previously created
pattern phrase is assigned cannot be used.
OFF
❍
◆
◆
✕
ON: When 0%
ON: When 1%–100%
Fade Out, Fade In
Line Input Select: Mute
Line Input Select: Mix
Disabled
●9.3 Equalizer
●9.4 Output Vol. Thru
●9.5 Busy Out *2
<Delay Time:Phrase Play:Repeat Play> AR-2000 System Version 1.03 or earlier
All settings Disabled (Busy always output)
<Delay Time:Phrase Play:Repeat Play> AR-2000 System Version 1.10 or later
✕ Disabled
Action 1: Re-create the pattern phrase so that previously created pattern
phrases are not assigned.
✕ Disabled
Action 2: Make a backup on another card and delete the pattern phrase.
✕
▲When there are song phrases
In the AR-2000 format, song phrases cannot be used.
ON:ON:ON
❍
❍
◆
◆
❍
❍
◆
◆
Busy Out: All ON
Busy Out: Delay ON
Busy Out: All ON
Busy Out: Delay ON
Busy Out: Repeat ON
Busy Out: All OFF
Busy Out: Repeat ON
Busy Out: All OFF
ON:ON:OFF
ON:OFF:ON
ON:OFF:OFF
OFF:ON:ON
OFF:ON:OFF
OFF:OFF:ON
OFF:OFF:OFF
Action : Make a backup on another card and delete the song phrase.
▲When there is a phrase at 501 or higher
In the AR-2000 format, only up to 500 phrases can be used.
Action : Copy the phrases to 500 or less, or make a backup on another
card and delete the phrase at 501 or higher.
●9.6 Display Sleep
✕ Disabled
▲When there is a phrase assigned at 501 or higher
*1, *2
When a phrase with the following settings is assigned at 501 or higher,
it cannot be used in the AR-2000 format.
• Pattern Phrase
• Direct Playback
• Program Playback
Please note that for *1 Line Thru settings and *2 Busy Out, playback
results may differ according to the AR-2000 system version.
To check the system version of the AR-2000 you're using, switch on the
power while holding down the SELECT dial on the front panel.
The version information appears on the upper portion of the screen.
Redo the settings so that no phrases are assigned at 501 or higher.
Action :
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording and Playing MIDI Data
(MIDI Phrases)
What Are MIDI Phrases?
You can record and play back MIDI data with the AR-3000R.
Sets of MIDI data recorded using the AR are called “MIDI
phrases.”
During recording or recording standby, this automatically
becomes MIDI THRU.
MIDI phrases and audio phrases are both treated as phrases
in the way.
Turning the Power On and Off → p. 24
Unit Settings
You can do things like taking MIDI data created on a MIDI
sequencer and recording it as a MIDI phrase on the AR-
3000R, then send the played-back data to a sound source
module or the like to make broadcast announcements.
Putting the Unit in Recording Standby
Make the correct connections, then turn on the power switch.
The AR-3000R saves MIDI data as Format 0 Standard MIDI
Files (SMF).
The AR-3000R can only play back Format 0 SMF data.
Turning the Power On and Off → p. 24
*
Audio phrases and MIDI phrases cannot be recorded, nor can
they be played back at the same time.
Recording Standby
1. Insert a formatted card into one of the slots.
*
When recording MIDI phrases, the effective capacity of a card
is related not only to the recording time, but also to the density
of the MIDI data. Please be aware that when you record MIDI
phrases, the possible recording time for any one card will vary
generated.
2. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the phrase number you
want to record. To switch between card slots A and B,
press the SELECT dial.
*
You cannot change the phrase number after recording, so be
sure to select the phrase number you want to record.
3. Hold down the STOP button and press the PLAY button
to go into recording standby.
fig.13-g01e
Controlling the unit by using MIDI signals is described in
another chapter.
Refer to “Controlling the AR-3000R Using MIDI Signals
(MIDI Control)” (p. 105).
Connecting Equipment
fig.13-01e (MIDI Connections)
During recording standby, the PLAY indicator and the
PAUSE indicator flash in red.
• If you try to re-record a phrase that’s already been
recorded, a prompt message appears. If you choose
“YES” and press the ENTER button, the recorded data
for the phrase is deleted and the unit goes into recording
standby. If you choose “NO,” the unit returns to the
normal display.
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
MIDI OUT
MIDI Sequencer
*
Please be aware that data deleted here cannot be recovered,
even if you cancel recording standby without recording
anything.
• When “Card Protect (p. 77)” is set to “ON,” recorded
phrases are protected and recording is not possible
(writing, overwriting, deleting, and editing card data is
prohibited).
MIDI IN
MIDI Sound Module
Powered Speaker
(for monitor)
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording and Playing MIDI Data
Selecting the Recording Connector
When you’re recording MIDI data, choose “MIDI-IN” as the
Starting and Ending Recording
1. Pressing the PLAY or PAUSE button while in recording
recording connector.
standby starts recording.
During recording, the PLAY indicator lights up in red.
2. Start playback of the MIDI data.
Procedure for Selecting the Recording
Connector
1. Put the unit into recording standby.
3. Press the STOP button to end recording.
2. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the REC-In, then press
the dial.
• Some MIDI sequencers output the setup data for the
MIDI sound module (data describing the tones for each
part, the volume, effects, etc.) when the song is
selected, and it may be impossible to record the MIDI
information correctly when recording is started on the
AR-3000R after song selection. Should this occur, first
start recording on the AR-3000R, and after that initiate
song selection and the start of playback on the MIDI
sequencer.
3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the MIDI-IN, then press
the ENTER button.
The screen like the one below appears.
4.
ig.13-g02e
*
Please be aware that if you press the SELECT dial instead of
the ENTER button, the setting is not confirmed.
• In MIDI recording on the AR-3000R, the tempo when
recorded is assumed to be 120. (Tempo information is
not stored.)
• Next, if you’re setting the MIDI time base, go to step 2 of
the procedure for setting the MIDI time base.
• You can’t change a phrase number later, so be sure to
choose the phrase number you want to record to, and
then record.
Setting the MIDI Time Base
The MIDI time base determines the precision with which you
can record notes, and differs from one equipment to another.
(On some equipment, this is called “resolution.”)
*
Recording cannot span two cards inserted in the slots. When
the free space on one card is used up, recording ends
automatically.
Set the time base for the AR-3000R to either 192 or 240, to
match the time base of the connected MIDI device.
When the time base of the connected MIDI device is:
24, 48, 96, 192, or 384 → Set the AR-3000R time base to 192
30, 60, 120, 240, or 480 → Set the AR-3000R time base to 240
Starting and Stopping Recording Through MIDI Playback
With the AR-3000R, you can start recording when a start
message is received from another MIDI device, and stop
recording when a stop message is received during recording.
During recording standby, recording starts when a System
Realtime start message (FAH) is received, and stops when a
stop message (FCH) is received.
Procedure for Setting the MIDI Time Base
1. Put the unit into recording standby.
2. Turn the SELECT dial to select “Time Base,” then press
the dial.
During playback, start (FAH), stop (FCH), and timing clock
(F8H) messages are sent.
*
You can set the Time Base only when “MIDI-IN” has been
selected as the recording connector.
3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the Time Base (192 or
240), then press the ENTER button.
What Is a Timing Clock?
*
Please be aware that if you press the SELECT dial instead of
the ENTER button, the setting is not confirmed.
This is MIDI information used when synchronizing a
number of instruments using MIDI. The playback device
sends clock messages at intervals that correspond to its own
tempo, and the receiving device operates in accordance with
those messages.
MIDI Implementation and MIDI Implementation Chart → p.
139 through p. 145
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording and Playing MIDI Data
Playback of MIDI Phrases
Playback Procedures
Manual Playback
Selection of MIDI Output (OUT/THRU)
This changes the function of the MIDI output connector.
1. Insert a card containing recorded information into a slot.
Here, select OUT.
2. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the phrase number to
play. To switch between card slots A and B, press the
SELECT dial.
OUT: This sends out MIDI information from the unit. Select
this when you want to play back MIDI phrases or send
Exclusive (SysEx) messages.
3.
THRU: This takes MIDI information from MIDI IN and sends
• Press the PLAY button, and the phrase starts playing
back. During playback of the phrase, the PLAY indicator
lights up in green.
it out unchanged. MIDI signals from the unit are not output.
Procedure for Setting MIDI Output
• Pressing the STOP button ends playback.
1. Press the MODE button. The MODE indicator lights up.
• During playback, you can choose the next song to play
(without stopping the phrase being played) by turning
the SELECT dial.
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “6.1 MIDI Output,” then
press the dial.
3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the MIDI Output (OUT),
*
Please be aware that you cannot pause a MIDI phrase.
then press the dial.
fig.13-g02e
Playback by Control Input
You can perform playback by control input and other means,
just as you can for audio phrases.
4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the setting. To quit without
making the settings, use the SELECT dial to choose
“NO,” then press the ENTER button.
Controlling the AR-3000R from an External Device → p. 85
When you’re finished making the setting, the display returns
to the setting item selection screen.
5. Press the MODE button.
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES”, then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
Setting the Playback Tempo
This sets the speed for playback of MIDI phrases in beats per
minute (a tempo of from 5 to 260). The setting is made for
individual phrases.
*
In MIDI recording on the AR-3000R, the tempo when
recorded is assumed to be 120. (Tempo information is not
stored.)
The setting for the MIDI playback tempo is made with a
phrase setting. Refer to “Changing the Playback Tempo for
MIDI Phrases (MIDI Playback Tempo)” (p. 60).
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the AR-3000R from an
External Device (Control Input Terminals)
You can control the unit from an external device by using the
input terminals, among the screw-on control terminals on the
the removed screws. Place the screws out of the reach of
small children. If a screw is accidentally swallowed,
immediately consult a physician.
unit’s rear panel.
This chapter describes how to connect external equipment
and make the settings on the AR-3000R.
Types of Control Input Playback
The varieties of control input playback are direct playback (p.
86), program playback (p. 89), and binary playback (p. 92).
To confirm phrases when selecting a phrase, you can use the
PLAY and STOP buttons to play and stop phrases, and the
PAUSE button to pause phrases. Note that you cannot
change settings during phrase playback.
The three playback methods yield the following nine types of
operational specifications according to their settings. Choose
the one that matches your usage conditions.
What Is No-voltage/Make-
contact?
• Direct Playback (NORMAL)
This is a contact that makes starting possible simply by
connecting two lines to the control input terminals and
shorting their ends. This is a general-use method that lets
you create start systems easily using only a switch and
without any need for a power source, enabling easy use for a
variety of applications.
• Direct Playback (FIRST-IN)
• Direct Playback (LAST-IN)
• Direct Playback (SEQUENCE)
• Program Playback
• Binary Playback (Level: OFF; Edge: OFF)
• Binary Playback (Level: ON; Edge: OFF)
• Binary Playback (Level: OFF; Edge: ON)
• Binary Playback (Level: ON; Edge: ON)
You can control recording and playback on the AR-3000R by
on and off signals input from an external device through the
no-voltage/make-contact or open collector circuit.
The range of situations where you can use the unit can be
expanded by connecting infrared sensors, external-start
connectors such as switches, relays, and timers, and the like
to the unit.
*
Different types of playback cannot be carried out at the same
time.
Operational Specifications for Control Input
Playback
The AR-3000R can help simplify installation operations by
making the starting-side contact hot and sharing the ground
as the common (COM) port.
fig.14-01e
When new control signals are
When control signals
input during playback of a phrase are input continuously
Direct Play
Normal
When priority is high, quits and
plays back the phrase specified
later. No effect when priority is low
or when the number is the same.
Repeated
Repeated
3000R” (p. 19) for more examples of usage of the control
input and output terminals.
First-In
Disabled
Quits and plays back the phrase Repeated
specified later.
Last-In
For information about the specifications of the control input
and output terminals, refer to “Specifications of the Control
Input/Output Terminals” (p. 137).
Sequence
Stored in memory (cued). After
phrase playback finishes, seque-
ntial start. Up to 100 can be cued.
Played back once only
Program Play
Binary Play
Playback in assigned
sequence, repeated
playback within the program.
Exchange advances to the
next program.
Disabled
Important Notes on Using the Control Input
and Output Terminals
*
The control input and output terminals cannot be used to
switch the power to the AR unit on or off.
Level: OFF
Edge: OFF
Disabled
Disabled
Played back once only
Repeated
*
The two common (COM) ports are connected internally, so
you can achieve operation by making the connection to either
one. At times such as when connecting more than one AR
control port to a single make contact, interconnect one COM
port from each AR. However, do not intermix this unit with
other AR series devices. Doing so may result in unstable
operation.
Level: ON
Edge: OFF
Level: OFF
Edge: ON
Quits and plays back the phrase Played back once only
specified later.
Level: ON
Edge: ON
Quits and plays back the phrase Repeated
specified later.
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the AR-3000R from an External Device
Type of Control Input Recording
There is one type of control input recording: Binary
Recording (p. 98).
Operational Specifications for
Direct Playback
Basic Operation of Direct Playback
fig.14-04e
Port NO. 1
Port NO. 2
STOP Port
Assigning a Phrase to a Port
and Playing It Back (Direct
Playback)
A0002
A0001
AUDIO OUTPUT
What Is Direct Playback?/Uses
A0001 Interrupted
and Applications
Playback:
By inputting control signals directly to Port Nos. 1 through
16, you can play back the phrases assigned to the port
numbers. You can play back up to 16 phrases. You need to
assign the phrases you want to Port Nos. 1 through 16 ahead
of time.
Input a control signal to a port from 1 to 16.
→ This plays the phrase assigned to the port.
Stop:
Input a control signal to the Stop port.
This is handy when you want to directly specify the phrases
you want using switches, relays, sensors, and the like.
Also, Direct playback includes normal playback, First-In
playback, Last-In playback, and sequence playback.
fig.14-02e
Control signal
Choose the one that matches your usage conditions.
...
...
16
A0050
1
2
3
4
5
Port No.
Phrase
Also refer to “Operational Specifications of Control Input
Playback” (p. 85).
A0002 A0010 B0008 A0021 B0050
Connecting External Equipment
Normal Playback
Input made to a port having higher priority takes
precedence, and will result in earlier playback.
Ports Used for Direct Play
“1 through 16”: Inputting a control signal directly to the port
having the number corresponding to the phrase starts
playback of the phrase.
Port No. 1 has the highest priority, with the priority
decreasing as the port number increases.
Priority (High) Port No. 1 → 2 → 3 → ... → 16 (Low)
“STOP”: This stops phrase playback.
When a control signal is input to a high-priority port during
phrase playback, playback of the current phrase is stopped,
Set to “ON” by shorting the above-mentioned port and
“COM (common).”
fig.14-03e
and playback of the specified phrase then begins.
fig.14-05e
Phrase playback
Port NO. 1
Port NO. 2
.....
A0002
A0001
AUDIO OUTPUT
A0002 Interrupted
No action results if a control signal is input to a low-priority
port (or the same numbered port) during phrase playback.
.....
fig.14-06e
Disabled
Port No.1
Common port
Phrase playback
Stop
Port No.2
A0001
Turning the Power On and Off → p. 24
AUDIO OUTPUT
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the AR-3000R from an External Device
fig.14-12e
Playback is repeated while the control signal is continuously
Port No.1
Port No.2
input.
fig.14-07e
Port No.1
A0001
A0002
AUDIO OUTPUT
A0001
A0001
A0001
AUDIO OUTPUT
Even when control signals are input continuously, playback
is conducted one time only and then ends.
First-In Playback
fig.14-13e
Disabled
The phrase played back earlier is given precedence in
playback.
Port No.1
During phrase playback, even when a new START signal is
A0001
AUDIO OUTPUT
input, it is disregarded.
fig.14-08e
Disabled
AR-3000R Settings
Disabled
Port No.1
Port No.2
If a card in AR-2000 format is inserted in either slot A or B (or
both), the AR-3000R can be used only for playback, and it is
not possible to record phrases or make any settings (except
for card conversion). Also, if you insert a card in AR-2000
format into slot A or B (or both) while making settings
(except for card conversion), operation will halt with an error
message, and cannot be resumed until such cards are
removed. To record or edit cards in AR-2000 format on the
AR-3000R, follow the steps in “Card Convert” (p. 78).
A0002
AUDIO OUTPUT
Playback is repeated while the control signal is continuously
input.
fig.14-09e
Port No.1
A0001
A0001
A0001
AUDIO OUTPUT
Last-In Playback
The control signal that is input later is given precedence in
playback.
Selecting the Control Input Mode
Select “DIRECT PLAY” from the control input modes
(DIRECT PLAY/PROGRAM PLAY/BINARY PLAY/
BINARY REC).
During phrase playback, when a different START signal is
newly input, playback of the current phrase is stopped, and
playback of the specified phrase begins.
fig.14-10e
*
You cannot achieve control input playback merely by
connecting a device to the port. Be sure to set the control input
mode to match the method used for connecting to the ports.
Port No.1
Port No.2
A0001
A0002
Procedure for Setting the Control Input Mode
AUDIO OUTPUT
1. Press the MODE button.
A0001 Interrupted
The MODE indicator lights up.
Playback is repeated while the control signal is continuously
input.
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “5.1 Control Input
fig.14-11e
Mode,” then press the dial.
Port No.1
3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose “DIRECT PLAY,” then
A0001
A0001
A0001
AUDIO OUTPUT
press the dial.
fig.14-g01e
Sequence Playback
When a new control signal is input during phrase playback,
the new phrase is then stored (queued).
When playback of the current phrase is finished, the
subsequently specified phrase is played back.
A maximum of 100 phrases can be stored (queued).
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the AR-3000R from an External Device
4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose YES, then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
ENTER button to enable the settings.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
Once the settings have been made successfully, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
5. Press the MODE button.
Assigning Phrases to the Ports
Assign phrases to control input Port Nos. 1 through 16.
If not assigning a phrase to a port, select “-----.”
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
While you can select phrases from Card A as well as Card B,
note that playback will not work properly if the card inserted
playback (if the phrase is not saved, the playback signal is
disregarded).
Selecting the Direct Playback Method
Select the Direct Playback Method (NORMAL/FIRST-IN/
LAST-IN/ SEQUENCE) to be used.
Settings When Formatting Cards (in Slot A)
fig.14-14e
...
...
1
2
3
4
5
16
A0016
Port No.
Phrase
A0001 A0002 A0003 A0004 A0005
“Operational Specifications for Direct Playback” → p. 86
Procedure for Setting the Direct Playback
Method
By assigning “PLAY” instead of a phrase, you can obtain
the same functions from that port as you do using the
PLAY button on the front panel.
1. Press the MODE button.
The MODE indicator lights up.
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “5.2 Direct Play,” then
<During Direct Playback>
press the dial.
By inputting a control signal to the port to which
“PLAY” is assigned, you can play back the phrase
indicated in the display. This is convenient when you
want to use an external device to start playback of
phrases selected with the SELECT dial.
3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the Direct Playback
system (NORMAL, FIRST-IN, LAST-IN, or SEQUENCE),
then press the dial.
fig.14-g02e
You can also stop playback using the STOP port.
<While in Phrase Record Standby>
When recording phrases, you can use the control input
terminals to start and stop recording (for more on
recording methods, please read “Recording Audio” (p.
40) as well).
• If making the settings in “Assigning Phrases to the
Ports,” proceed to Step 4 in the procedure for assigning
the phrases.
• To quit making settings, press the ENTER button.
When in recording standby, if the port to which “PLAY”
is assigned is set to “ON,” recording will begin. This is
convenient when you want to start recording remotely,
using an external device.
4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
You can also stop recording using the Stop port.
Once the settings have been made successfully, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
*
However, this method cannot be used for switching to
recording standby, even when control signals are sent to
both the port to which “PLAY” is assigned and the STOP
port.
5. Press the MODE button.
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the AR-3000R from an External Device
*
*
While making the settings, you can go back to the previous
entry position (highlighted) by using the PAUSE (BACK)
button.
Procedure for Assigning Phrases
1. Press the MODE button.
The MODE indicator lights up.
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “5.2 Direct Play,” then
press the dial.
3. Press the SELECT dial to advance the input location
(highlighted) to “No. 1.”
4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the number of the
control input port that is to be set, then press the dial.
fig.14-g03e
Playing Back Phrases in the
Order They Are Selected
(Program Playback)
• Nos. 1-16: Port Nos. 1 through No. 16
• END: This quits making the settings.
What is Program Playback?/
• RESET: Restores the settings at the time the card was
formatted.
Uses and Applications
You can have the group of preset phrases play back in the
order they are selected by inputting a control signal to the
START port.
• CLEAR: Erases all settings.
5. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card containing the
phrase you want to assign to the port, then press the dial.
fig.14-g04e
With program playback, you can register up to a maximum
of 100 phrases in each of the five patterns of Programs 1
through 5.
Since the order and duration of the phrases is predetermined,
this is a convenient option when you have only one contact,
• PLAY: Causes this connector to perform the same action
as that resulting from pressing the PLAY button on the
front panel.
such as a timer or switch, with which to trigger this action.
fig.14-15e
• -----: Selected when no phrase is set to the control input
port.
Program 1
No. Phrase
START signal
1
2
3
:
A0001
A0005
A0004
:
Turn the SELECT dial to choose the phrase to assign to the
port, then press the dial.
EXCHANGE signal
START signal
START signal
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to assign the rest of the phrases.
START signal
100 A0100
7. To quit assigning phrases, turn the SELECT dial in step 4
Program 2
No. Phrase
to choose “END,” then press the dial.
fig.14-g05e
START signal
START signal
START signal
1
2
3
:
B0002
B0003
A0006
:
START signal
100 B0088
8. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
:
:
:
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
Once the settings have been made successfully, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
Program 5
No. Phrase
START signal
START signal
START signal
9. Press the MODE button.
1
2
3
:
A0020
B0010
A0021
:
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
START signal
100 B0011
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the AR-3000R from an External Device
fig.14-17e
Connecting External Equipment
START Port
Ports Used in Program Playback
STOP Port
“START”: Plays back phrases in the order set in program
playback.
No. 001
No. 002
AUDIO OUTPUT
“STOP”: This stops phrase playback.
No. 001 Interrupted
“INC” (Increment): Advances through the program playback
order.
START Port
“DEC” (Decrement): Goes back through the previous phrases
in the program playback order.
No.001 No.002 No.003
AUDIO OUTPUT
“EXCHANGE”: Advances through the cycle of the Programs
1 through 5 (1-2-3-4-5-1-2...). In this case, playback begins
from the first phrase selected in the program to which you
have switched.
Playback:
Input a control signal to the START port.
→ Phrases are played back in accord with the registered
program playback order.
*
If no settings are made for Programs 2 through 5, playback
begins from the first phrase set in Program 1.
Stop:
Input a control signal to the STOP port.
→ This stops phrase playback.
Advancing in the Playback Sequence:
Input a control signal to the INC (Increment) port.
Set to “ON” by shorting the above-mentioned port and
“COM (common).”
fig.14-16e
→ This advances through the program playback order one
phrase at a time.
Going Through the Playback Sequence in Reverse
Order:
Input a control signal to the DEC (Decrement) port.
Common port
Playback
Stop
→ This causes the phrases to go back through the program
playback order one phrase at a time.
Advance the phrase sequence by one
Make the phrase sequence go back by one
Advance the program sequence by one
Advancing Through Programs 1 Through 5:
Input a control signal to the EXCHANGE port.
Turning the Power On and Off → p. 24
→ This advances through Programs 1 Through 5 (1-2-3-4-5-1-
2-...).
Operational Specifications for
Playback begins from the first phrase selected in the program
to which you have switched.
Program Playback
When a one-shot control signal is input from a timer or
similar device, a single registered phrase is played back.
*
If no settings are made in Programs 2 through 5, playback
begins from the first phrase set in Program 1.
*
If there is no registered phrase saved, the next registered
phrase is played back.
During phrase playback, even when a new START signal is
input, it is disregarded.
fig.14-18e
When consecutive signals are input, phrases are played back
in succession in the order registered in the program.
Disabled
START Port
No. 001
AUDIO OUTPUT
If input of START signals continues when the end of the last
phrase in Program 1 is reached, playback then continues
with the first phrase in Program 1. To advance to Program 2,
input a control signal to the “EXCHANGE” port.
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the AR-3000R from an External Device
fig.14-19e
AR-3000R Settings
START Port
EXCHANGE Port
Program 1
No. 001
Program 2
No. 001
If a card in AR-2000 format is inserted in either slot A or B (or
both), the AR-3000R can be used only for playback, and it is
AUDIO OUTPUT
However, if no settings are made for Programs 2 through 5
when a control signal is input to the “EXCHANGE” port,
playback continues after returning to the beginning in
not possible to record phrases or make any settings (except
for card conversion). Also, if you insert a card in AR-2000
format into slot A or B (or both) while making settings
(except for card conversion), operation will halt with an error
message, and cannot be resumed until such cards are
removed. To record or edit cards in AR-2000 format on the
AR-3000R, follow the steps in “Card Convert” (p. 78).
Program 1 (Reset operation).
fig.14-20e (Count Playback 3)
START Port
EXCHANGE Port
Program Play 1
No. 001
Program Play 1
No. 001
AUDIO OUTPUT
Selecting the Control Input Mode
Select “PROGRAM PLAY” from the control input modes
(DIRECT PLAY/PROGRAM PLAY/BINARY PLAY/
BINARY REC).
Also refer to “Operational Specifications of Control Input
Playback” (p. 85).
*
You cannot achieve control input playback merely by
connecting a device to the port. Be sure to set the control input
mode to match the method used for connecting to the ports.
Important Note Regarding Power Outages and Similar
Situations
If due to a blackout or other cause the power to the AR-3000R
is cut during program playback, the program playback is
reset when the power is restored. In such instances, input
control signals to the INC, DEC, and EXCHANGE ports to
Procedure for Setting the Control Input Mode
1. Press the MODE button.
The MODE indicator lights up.
restore the program playback order.
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “5.1 Control Input
fig.14-21e
Mode,” then press the dial.
START Port
INC Port
3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose “PROGRAM PLAY,”
then press the dial.
DEC Port
fig.14-g06e
EXCHANGE Port
No.
003
No.
003
Program 1
No. 001
Program 2
No. 001
AUDIO OUTPUT
No. 002 → No. 003
No. 004 → No. 003
4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
Program 1 → Program 2
ENTER button to enable the settings.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
Display Indications During
Program Playback
Once the settings have been made successfully, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
During program playback, the following appears in the
display.
fig.14-21ae
5. Press the MODE button.
Program Number
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
Playback order
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
Remaining Time/Elapsed Time
Registered Phrase No.
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the AR-3000R from an External Device
7. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to store more phrases.
Registering Phrases
Register the phrases in the program playback order. Up to a
maximum of 100 phrases can be registered in each of the five
patterns of Programs 1 through 5.
8. To cancel the save process, then in step 4, turn the
SELECT dial to choose “END,” then press the dial.
fig.14-g09e
While you can select phrases from Card A as well as Card B,
note that playback will not work properly if the card inserted
when the phrase was registered is not inserted at the time of
playback (if the phrase is not saved, the next phrase is sought
and then played back).
9. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
Once the settings have been made successfully, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
Settings When Formatting Cards (in Slot A)
fig.14-22e
10.Press the MODE button.
Program 1
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
No. Phrase
1
2
3
:
A0001
A0002
A0003
:
*
While making the settings, you can go back to the previous
entry position (highlighted) by using the PAUSE (BACK)
button.
100 A0100
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
Program 2–5: No setting has been supplied.
Procedure for Registering Phrases
1. Press the MODE button.
The MODE indicator lights up.
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “5.3 Program Playback,”
Specifying Phrase Numbers
in Binary Notation (Binary
Playback)
then press the dial.
3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the Program No. where
you want to make the setting (1 through 5), then press
the dial.
fig.14-g07e
What is Binary Playback?/Uses
and Applications
In binary playback, phrases are selected by means of binary
(Base 2) control signal input to the Port No. 1 through 11,
with the selected phrases played back when control signals
are input to the START port. You can select and play back up
to a maximum of 2000 phrases.
4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the playback sequence,
then press the dial.
• Nos. 001-100: Playback order
• END: Finishes the setting process.
This allows all phrases to be specified with control signals
(from a switch or other ON/OFF signal device) without the
• RESET: Restores the settings the card had when
formatted.
use of computers or other complicated equipment.
• CLEAR: Erases all settings.
fig.14-23e
Binary Specification Port 1–11
000001110000
5. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card containing the
phrase you want to store, then press the dial.
fig.14-g08e
Playback
START signal
Phrase A0112
*
*
To conduct binary playback, you will need to obtain a control
device capable of generating binary signals.
6. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the phrase you want to
Input of binary specifications should be completed in no more
than 50 milliseconds.
store, then press the dial.
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the AR-3000R from an External Device
Connecting External Equipment
Terminals Used in Binary Playback
Operational Specifications of
Binary Playback
Basic Operation of Binary Playback
“1-10”: Phrases are specified in binary format using
combinations of 0 (OFF) and 1 (ON).
fig.14-25e
A0001
“11”: 0 (OFF) and 1 (ON) are used to select Card A and Card
B.
Binary Specification
Port 1–11
START Port
“START”: Plays back phrases.
“STOP”: This stops phrase playback.
A0001
AUDIO OUTPUT
Set to “ON” by shorting the above-mentioned port and
Playback:
“COM (common).”
fig.14-24e
Specify the phrases using combinations of signals to Port
Nos. 1 through 10 and 0 (OFF) and 1 (ON) of Port No. 11, and
input a control signal to the “START” port.
Card select
Phrase select
......
→ This plays back the specified phrase.
Stop:
12: not use
Input a control signal to the Stop port.
→ This stops phrase playback.
In addition, in binary playback you can use combinations of
playback trigger (Level/Edge) ON and OFF to achieve the
four types of playback shown below. Set it to match your
usage conditions.
Common Port
Playback
Stop
Turning the Power On and Off → p. 24
Also refer to “Operational Specifications of Control Input
Playback” (p. 85).
Level: OFF, Edge: OFF
Even without connecting to all ten ports used for making the
binary specifications, you can still conduct binary playback.
The number of phrases that can be specified is determined by
the formula “two to the nth power minus one” (with “n”
being the number of connectors used).
fig.14-26e
A0001
A0002
Disabled
Binary Specification
Port 1–11
Disabled
START Port
Example:
A0001
A0002
AUDIO OUTPUT
Using three timers or other such devices capable of
outputting the necessary signals gives two to the third power
minus one (i.e., 8 - 1 = 7), meaning you can specify the seven
phrases 001 through 007.
The binary-specified phrase is played back only once.
Newly input START signals during playback of a phrase are
disregarded.
Even when START signals are input continuously, the phrase
is played back only once and stopped. Since a phrase is
played back by the instrument detecting the start when the
port switches on from the off status, be sure to make the
control signal to the START port OFF after playback of the
phrase is finished.
However, if Port No. 11 is not connected, only “OFF” is
enabled, leaving Card A as the only card that may be
selected.
Start signals feature other special requirements.
Level: ON, Edge: OFF
fig.14-27e
A0001
A0002 A0003
Binary Specification
Port 1–11
Disabled
START Port
A0001 A0001
A0002
A0003
AUDIO OUTPUT
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the AR-3000R from an External Device
The binary-specified phrase is played back repeatedly.
AR-3000R Settings
Phrases are played back repeatedly as long as the START
signal is input continuously.
With START signals being input continuously, playback of
phrases may be started by binary specification.
If a card in AR-2000 format is inserted in either slot A or B (or
both), the AR-3000R can be used only for playback, and it is
not possible to record phrases or make any settings (except
for card conversion). Also, if you insert a card in AR-2000
format into slot A or B (or both) while making settings
(except for card conversion), operation will halt with an error
message, and cannot be resumed until such cards are
removed. To record or edit cards in AR-2000 format on the
AR-3000R, follow the steps in “Card Convert” (p. 78).
When the Start port control signal is changed to OFF,
playback tops after completion of the phrase currently being
played.
Newly input START signals during playback of a phrase are
disregarded.
Level: OFF, Edge: ON
fig.14-28e
A0001
A0002
A0003
Selecting the Control Input Mode
Select “BINARY PLAY” from the control input modes
(DIRECT PLAY/PROGRAM PLAY/BINARY PLAY/
BINARY REC).
Binary Specification
Port 1–11
Disabled
START Port
A0002
A0003
A0001
AUDIO OUTPUT
*
You cannot achieve control input playback merely by
connecting a device to the port. Be sure to set the control input
mode to match the method used for connecting to the ports.
A0001 Interrupted
The binary-specified phrase is played back only once.
When a START signal is input again during playback of a
phrase, the phrase currently being played back is stopped,
and playback of the specified phrase begins.
Procedure for Setting the Control Input Mode
1. Press the MODE button.
The MODE indicator lights up.
Even when START signals are input continuously, the phrase
is played back only once and then stopped. Since a phrase is
played back by the instrument detecting the start when the
port switches on from the off status, be sure to make the
control signal to the Start connector OFF after playback of the
phrase is finished.
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “5.1 Control Input
Mode,” then press the dial.
3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose “BINARY PLAY,” then
press the dial.
fig.14-g10e
Level: ON, Edge: ON
fig.14-29e
A0001
A0002
A0003 A0004
Binary Specification
Port 1–11
4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
START Port
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
A0001 A0001 A0002
A0004
A0003
AUDIO OUTPUT
Once the settings have been made successfully, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
A0003 Interrupted
The binary-specified phrase is played back repeatedly.
5. Press the MODE button.
Phrases are played back repeatedly as long as the START
signal is input continuously.
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
With START signals being input continuously, playback of
phrases may be started by binary specification.
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
When the Start port control signal is changed to OFF,
playback tops after completion of the phrase currently being
played.
When a START signal is input again during playback of a
phrase, the phrase currently being played back is stopped,
and playback of the specified phrase begins.
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the AR-3000R from an External Device
Playback Trigger Settings (Level/Edge)
Use combinations of playback trigger (Level/Edge) ON and
To Specify Phrases With Binary
Signals
OFF to achieve the four types of playback shown below.
Example: Specifying Phrase A0015 (Card: A, Phrase #: 0015)
• Level: OFF; Edge: OFF
• Level: ON; Edge: OFF
• Level: OFF; Edge: ON
• Level: ON; Edge: ON
1. Convert the phrase number to a binary signal number.
”0” (OFF)
”1” (ON)
Phrase Number/Binary Signal Correspondence Table (p. 96)
Operational Specifications of Binary Playback → p. 93
The phrase number “0015” becomes the binary signal
“0000001111.”
Procedure for Setting the Playback Triggers
2. Select Card A or B with and ON or OFF control signal to
1. Press the MODE button.
Port No. 11.
The MODE indicator lights up.
Card A: “0” (OFF)
Card B: “1” (ON)
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “5.4 Binary Play,” then
press the dial.
*
If there is no connection to Port No. 11, this is the same as
“OFF,” and Card A is selected.
3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the playback trigger
Level (OFF or ON), then press the ENTER button.
With the above steps, Phrase No. A0015 is converted to:
fig.14-g11e
fig.14-30e
Port No.
Input signal → 1
→ 1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
0
6
0
7
0
8
0
9
0
10
0
Card
4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the playback trigger
Phrase No. (Binary)
Edge (OFF or ON), then press the dial.
5. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
• Note that the direction of the phrase numbers (binary)
and port numbers are reversed.
ENTER button to enable the settings.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
• While you can select phrases from Card A as well as
Card B, note that playback will not work properly if the
card inserted when the phrase was registered is not
inserted at the time of playback (if the phrase is not
saved, the playback signal is disregarded).
Once the settings have been made successfully, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
6. Press the MODE button.
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
• Input of binary specifications should be completed in no
more than 50 milliseconds.
*
While making the settings, you can go back to the previous
entry position (highlighted) by using the PAUSE (BACK)
button.
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the AR-3000 from an External Device
Phrase Number/Binary Signal Correspondence Table
fig.14-31e
Phrase
No.
Port No.
10987654321
Phrase
No.
Port No.
10987654321
Port No.
10987654321
Port No.
10987654321
Phrase
No.
Port No.
10987654321
Phrase
No.
Phrase
No.
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026
0027
0028
0029
0030
0031
0032
0033
0034
0035
0036
0037
0038
0039
0040
0041
0042
0043
0044
0045
0046
0047
0048
0049
0050
0051
0052
0053
0054
0055
0056
0057
0058
0059
0060
0061
0062
0063
0064
0065
0066
0067
0068
0069
0070
0071
0072
0073
0074
0075
0076
0077
0078
0079
0080
0081
0082
0083
0084
0085
0086
0087
0088
0089
0090
0091
0092
0093
0094
0095
0096
0097
0098
0099
0100
0000000001
0000000010
0000000011
0000000100
0000000101
0000000110
0000000111
0000001000
0000001001
0000001010
0000001011
0000001100
0000001101
0000001110
0000001111
0000010000
0000010001
0000010010
0000010011
0000010100
0000010101
0000010110
0000010111
0000011000
0000011001
0000011010
0000011011
0000011100
0000011101
0000011110
0000011111
0000100000
0000100001
0000100010
0000100011
0000100100
0000100101
0000100110
0000100111
0000101000
0000101001
0000101010
0000101011
0000101100
0000101101
0000101110
0000101111
0000110000
0000110001
0000110010
0000110011
0000110100
0000110101
0000110110
0000110111
0000111000
0000111001
0000111010
0000111011
0000111100
0000111101
0000111110
0000111111
0001000000
0001000001
0001000010
0001000011
0001000100
0001000101
0001000110
0001000111
0001001000
0001001001
0001001010
0001001011
0001001100
0001001101
0001001110
0001001111
0001010000
0001010001
0001010010
0001010011
0001010100
0001010101
0001010110
0001010111
0001011000
0001011001
0001011010
0001011011
0001011100
0001011101
0001011110
0001011111
0001100000
0001100001
0001100010
0001100011
0001100100
0101
0102
0103
0104
0105
0106
0107
0108
0109
0110
0111
0112
0113
0114
0115
0116
0117
0118
0119
0120
0121
0122
0123
0124
0125
0126
0127
0128
0129
0130
0131
0132
0133
0134
0135
0136
0137
0138
0139
0140
0141
0142
0143
0144
0145
0146
0147
0148
0149
0150
0151
0152
0153
0154
0155
0156
0157
0158
0159
0160
0161
0162
0163
0164
0165
0166
0167
0168
0169
0170
0171
0172
0173
0174
0175
0176
0177
0178
0179
0180
0181
0182
0183
0184
0185
0186
0187
0188
0189
0190
0191
0192
0193
0194
0195
0196
0197
0198
0199
0200
0001100101
0001100110
0001100111
0001101000
0001101001
0001101010
0001101011
0001101100
0001101101
0001101110
0001101111
0001110000
0001110001
0001110010
0001110011
0001110100
0001110101
0001110110
0001110111
0001111000
0001111001
0001111010
0001111011
0001111100
0001111101
0001111110
0001111111
0010000000
0010000001
0010000010
0010000011
0010000100
0010000101
0010000110
0010000111
0010001000
0010001001
0010001010
0010001011
0010001100
0010001101
0010001110
0010001111
0010010000
0010010001
0010010010
0010010011
0010010100
0010010101
0010010110
0010010111
0010011000
0010011001
0010011010
0010011011
0010011100
0010011101
0010011110
0010011111
0010100000
0010100001
0010100010
0010100011
0010100100
0010100101
0010100110
0010100111
0010101000
0010101001
0010101010
0010101011
0010101100
0010101101
0010101110
0010101111
0010110000
0010110001
0010110010
0010110011
0010110100
0010110101
0010110110
0010110111
0010111000
0010111001
0010111010
0010111011
0010111100
0010111101
0010111110
0010111111
0011000000
0011000001
0011000010
0011000011
0011000100
0011000101
0011000110
0011000111
0011001000
0201
0202
0203
0204
0205
0206
0207
0208
0209
0210
0211
0212
0213
0214
0215
0216
0217
0218
0219
0220
0221
0222
0223
0224
0225
0226
0227
0228
0229
0230
0231
0232
0233
0234
0235
0236
0237
0238
0239
0240
0241
0242
0243
0244
0245
0246
0247
0248
0249
0250
0251
0252
0253
0254
0255
0256
0257
0258
0259
0260
0261
0262
0263
0264
0265
0266
0267
0268
0269
0270
0271
0272
0273
0274
0275
0276
0277
0278
0279
0280
0281
0282
0283
0284
0285
0286
0287
0288
0289
0290
0291
0292
0293
0294
0295
0296
0297
0298
0299
0300
0011001001
0011001010
0011001011
0011001100
0011001101
0011001110
0011001111
0011010000
0011010001
0011010010
0011010011
0011010100
0011010101
0011010110
0011010111
0011011000
0011011001
0011011010
0011011011
0011011100
0011011101
0011011110
0011011111
0011100000
0011100001
0011100010
0011100011
0011100100
0011100101
0011100110
0011100111
0011101000
0011101001
0011101010
0011101011
0011101100
0011101101
0011101110
0011101111
0011110000
0011110001
0011110010
0011110011
0011110100
0011110101
0011110110
0011110111
0011111000
0011111001
0011111010
0011111011
0011111100
0011111101
0011111110
0011111111
0100000000
0100000001
0100000010
0100000011
0100000100
0100000101
0100000110
0100000111
0100001000
0100001001
0100001010
0100001011
0100001100
0100001101
0100001110
0100001111
0100010000
0100010001
0100010010
0100010011
0100010100
0100010101
0100010110
0100010111
0100011000
0100011001
0100011010
0100011011
0100011100
0100011101
0100011110
0100011111
0100100000
0100100001
0100100010
0100100011
0100100100
0100100101
0100100110
0100100111
0100101000
0100101001
0100101010
0100101011
0100101100
0301
0302
0303
0304
0305
0306
0307
0308
0309
0310
0311
0312
0313
0314
0315
0316
0317
0318
0319
0320
0321
0322
0323
0324
0325
0326
0327
0328
0329
0330
0331
0332
0333
0334
0335
0336
0337
0338
0339
0340
0341
0342
0343
0344
0345
0346
0347
0348
0349
0350
0351
0352
0353
0354
0355
0356
0357
0358
0359
0360
0361
0362
0363
0364
0365
0366
0367
0368
0369
0370
0371
0372
0373
0374
0375
0376
0377
0378
0379
0380
0381
0382
0383
0384
0385
0386
0387
0388
0389
0390
0391
0392
0393
0394
0395
0396
0397
0398
0399
0400
0100101101
0100101110
0100101111
0100110000
0100110001
0100110010
0100110011
0100110100
0100110101
0100110110
0100110111
0100111000
0100111001
0100111010
0100111011
0100111100
0100111101
0100111110
0100111111
0101000000
0101000001
0101000010
0101000011
0101000100
0101000101
0101000110
0101000111
0101001000
0101001001
0101001010
0101001011
0101001100
0101001101
0101001110
0101001111
0101010000
0101010001
0101010010
0101010011
0101010100
0101010101
0101010110
0101010111
0101011000
0101011001
0101011010
0101011011
0101011100
0101011101
0101011110
0101011111
0101100000
0101100001
0101100010
0101100011
0101100100
0101100101
0101100110
0101100111
0101101000
0101101001
0101101010
0101101011
0101101100
0101101101
0101101110
0101101111
0101110000
0101110001
0101110010
0101110011
0101110100
0101110101
0101110110
0101110111
0101111000
0101111001
0101111010
0101111011
0101111100
0101111101
0101111110
0101111111
0110000000
0110000001
0110000010
0110000011
0110000100
0110000101
0110000110
0110000111
0110001000
0110001001
0110001010
0110001011
0110001100
0110001101
0110001110
0110001111
0110010000
0401
0402
0403
0404
0405
0406
0407
0408
0409
0410
0411
0412
0413
0414
0415
0416
0417
0418
0419
0420
0421
0422
0423
0424
0425
0426
0427
0428
0429
0430
0431
0432
0433
0434
0435
0436
0437
0438
0439
0440
0441
0442
0443
0444
0445
0446
0447
0448
0449
0450
0451
0452
0453
0454
0455
0456
0457
0458
0459
0460
0461
0462
0463
0464
0465
0466
0467
0468
0469
0470
0471
0472
0473
0474
0475
0476
0477
0478
0479
0480
0481
0482
0483
0484
0485
0486
0487
0488
0489
0490
0491
0492
0493
0494
0495
0496
0497
0498
0499
0500
0110010001
0110010010
0110010011
0110010100
0110010101
0110010110
0110010111
0110011000
0110011001
0110011010
0110011011
0110011100
0110011101
0110011110
0110011111
0110100000
0110100001
0110100010
0110100011
0110100100
0110100101
0110100110
0110100111
0110101000
0110101001
0110101010
0110101011
0110101100
0110101101
0110101110
0110101111
0110110000
0110110001
0110110010
0110110011
0110110100
0110110101
0110110110
0110110111
0110111000
0110111001
0110111010
0110111011
0110111100
0110111101
0110111110
0110111111
0111000000
0111000001
0111000010
0111000011
0111000100
0111000101
0111000110
0111000111
0111001000
0111001001
0111001010
0111001011
0111001100
0111001101
0111001110
0111001111
0111010000
0111010001
0111010010
0111010011
0111010100
0111010101
0111010110
0111010111
0111011000
0111011001
0111011010
0111011011
0111011100
0111011101
0111011110
0111011111
0111100000
0111100001
0111100010
0111100011
0111100100
0111100101
0111100110
0111100111
0111101000
0111101001
0111101010
0111101011
0111101100
0111101101
0111101110
0111101111
0111110000
0111110001
0111110010
0111110011
0111110100
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the AR-3000 from an External Device
fig.14-32e
Phrase
No.
Port No.
10987654321
Phrase
No.
Port No.
10987654321
Port No.
10987654321
Port No.
10987654321
Phrase
No.
Port No.
10987654321
Phrase
No.
Phrase
No.
0501
0502
0503
0504
0505
0506
0507
0508
0509
0510
0511
0512
0513
0514
0515
0516
0517
0518
0519
0520
0521
0522
0523
0524
0525
0526
0527
0528
0529
0530
0531
0532
0533
0534
0535
0536
0537
0538
0539
0540
0541
0542
0543
0544
0545
0546
0547
0548
0549
0550
0551
0552
0553
0554
0555
0556
0557
0558
0559
0560
0561
0562
0563
0564
0565
0566
0567
0568
0569
0570
0571
0572
0573
0574
0575
0576
0577
0578
0579
0580
0581
0582
0583
0584
0585
0586
0587
0588
0589
0590
0591
0592
0593
0594
0595
0596
0597
0598
0599
0600
0111110101
0111110110
0111110111
0111111000
0111111001
0111111010
0111111011
0111111100
0111111101
0111111110
0111111111
1000000000
1000000001
1000000010
1000000011
1000000100
1000000101
1000000110
1000000111
1000001000
1000001001
1000001010
1000001011
1000001100
1000001101
1000001110
1000001111
1000010000
1000010001
1000010010
1000010011
1000010100
1000010101
1000010110
1000010111
1000011000
1000011001
1000011010
1000011011
1000011100
1000011101
1000011110
1000011111
1000100000
1000100001
1000100010
1000100011
1000100100
1000100101
1000100110
1000100111
1000101000
1000101001
1000101010
1000101011
1000101100
1000101101
1000101110
1000101111
1000110000
1000110001
1000110010
1000110011
1000110100
1000110101
1000110110
1000110111
1000111000
1000111001
1000111010
1000111011
1000111100
1000111101
1000111110
1000111111
1001000000
1001000001
1001000010
1001000011
1001000100
1001000101
1001000110
1001000111
1001001000
1001001001
1001001010
1001001011
1001001100
1001001101
1001001110
1001001111
1001010000
1001010001
1001010010
1001010011
1001010100
1001010101
1001010110
1001010111
1001011000
0601
0602
0603
0604
0605
0606
0607
0608
0609
0610
0611
0612
0613
0614
0615
0616
0617
0618
0619
0620
0621
0622
0623
0624
0625
0626
0627
0628
0629
0630
0631
0632
0633
0634
0635
0636
0637
0638
0639
0640
0641
0642
0643
0644
0645
0646
0647
0648
0649
0650
0651
0652
0653
0654
0655
0656
0657
0658
0659
0660
0661
0662
0663
0664
0665
0666
0667
0668
0669
0670
0671
0672
0673
0674
0675
0676
0677
0678
0679
0680
0681
0682
0683
0684
0685
0686
0687
0688
0689
0690
0691
0692
0693
0694
0695
0696
0697
0698
0699
0700
1001011001
1001011010
1001011011
1001011100
1001011101
1001011110
1001011111
1001100000
1001100001
1001100010
1001100011
1001100100
1001100101
1001100110
1001100111
1001101000
1001101001
1001101010
1001101011
1001101100
1001101101
1001101110
1001101111
1001110000
1001110001
1001110010
1001110011
1001110100
1001110101
1001110110
1001110111
1001111000
1001111001
1001111010
1001111011
1001111100
1001111101
1001111110
1001111111
1010000000
1010000001
1010000010
1010000011
1010000100
1010000101
1010000110
1010000111
1010001000
1010001001
1010001010
1010001011
1010001100
1010001101
1010001110
1010001111
1010010000
1010010001
1010010010
1010010011
1010010100
1010010101
1010010110
1010010111
1010011000
1010011001
1010011010
1010011011
1010011100
1010011101
1010011110
1010011111
1010100000
1010100001
1010100010
1010100011
1010100100
1010100101
1010100110
1010100111
1010101000
1010101001
1010101010
1010101011
1010101100
1010101101
1010101110
1010101111
1010110000
1010110001
1010110010
1010110011
1010110100
1010110101
1010110110
1010110111
1010111000
1010111001
1010111010
1010111011
1010111100
0701
0702
0703
0704
0705
0706
0707
0708
0709
0710
0711
0712
0713
0714
0715
0716
0717
0718
0719
0720
0721
0722
0723
0724
0725
0726
0727
0728
0729
0730
0731
0732
0733
0734
0735
0736
0737
0738
0739
0740
0741
0742
0743
0744
0745
0746
0747
0748
0749
0750
0751
0752
0753
0754
0755
0756
0757
0758
0759
0760
0761
0762
0763
0764
0765
0766
0767
0768
0769
0770
0771
0772
0773
0774
0775
0776
0777
0778
0779
0780
0781
0782
0783
0784
0785
0786
0787
0788
0789
0790
0791
0792
0793
0794
0795
0796
0797
0798
0799
0800
1010111101
1010111110
1010111111
1011000000
1011000001
1011000010
1011000011
1011000100
1011000101
1011000110
1011000111
1011001000
1011001001
1011001010
1011001011
1011001100
1011001101
1011001110
1011001111
1011010000
1011010001
1011010010
1011010011
1011010100
1011010101
1011010110
1011010111
1011011000
1011011001
1011011010
1011011011
1011011100
1011011101
1011011110
1011011111
1011100000
1011100001
1011100010
1011100011
1011100100
1011100101
1011100110
1011100111
1011101000
1011101001
1011101010
1011101011
1011101100
1011101101
1011101110
1011101111
1011110000
1011110001
1011110010
1011110011
1011110100
1011110101
1011110110
1011110111
1011111000
1011111001
1011111010
1011111011
1011111100
1011111101
1011111110
1011111111
1100000000
1100000001
1100000010
1100000011
1100000100
1100000101
1100000110
1100000111
1100001000
1100001001
1100001010
1100001011
1100001100
1100001101
1100001110
1100001111
1100010000
1100010001
1100010010
1100010011
1100010100
1100010101
1100010110
1100010111
1100011000
1100011001
1100011010
1100011011
1100011100
1100011101
1100011110
1100011111
1100100000
0801
0802
0803
0804
0805
0806
0807
0808
0809
0810
0811
0812
0813
0814
0815
0816
0817
0818
0819
0820
0821
0822
0823
0824
0825
0826
0827
0828
0829
0830
0831
0832
0833
0834
0835
0836
0837
0838
0839
0840
0841
0842
0843
0844
0845
0846
0847
0848
0849
0850
0851
0852
0853
0854
0855
0856
0857
0858
0859
0860
0861
0862
0863
0864
0865
0866
0867
0868
0869
0870
0871
0872
0873
0874
0875
0876
0877
0878
0879
0880
0881
0882
0883
0884
0885
0886
0887
0888
0889
0890
0891
0892
0893
0894
0895
0896
0897
0898
0899
0900
1100100001
1100100010
1100100011
1100100100
1100100101
1100100110
1100100111
1100101000
1100101001
1100101010
1100101011
1100101100
1100101101
1100101110
1100101111
1100110000
1100110001
1100110010
1100110011
1100110100
1100110101
1100110110
1100110111
1100111000
1100111001
1100111010
1100111011
1100111100
1100111101
1100111110
1100111111
1101000000
1101000001
1101000010
1101000011
1101000100
1101000101
1101000110
1101000111
1101001000
1101001001
1101001010
1101001011
1101001100
1101001101
1101001110
1101001111
1101010000
1101010001
1101010010
1101010011
1101010100
1101010101
1101010110
1101010111
1101011000
1101011001
1101011010
1101011011
1101011100
1101011101
1101011110
1101011111
1101100000
1101100001
1101100010
1101100011
1101100100
1101100101
1101100110
1101100111
1101101000
1101101001
1101101010
1101101011
1101101100
1101101101
1101101110
1101101111
1101110000
1101110001
1101110010
1101110011
1101110100
1101110101
1101110110
1101110111
1101111000
1101111001
1101111010
1101111011
1101111100
1101111101
1101111110
1101111111
1110000000
1110000001
1110000010
1110000011
1110000100
0901
0902
0903
0904
0905
0906
0907
0908
0909
0910
0911
0912
0913
0914
0915
0916
0917
0918
0919
0920
0921
0922
0923
0924
0925
0926
0927
0928
0929
0930
0931
0932
0933
0934
0935
0936
0937
0938
0939
0940
0941
0942
0943
0944
0945
0946
0947
0948
0949
0950
0951
0952
0953
0954
0955
0956
0957
0958
0959
0960
0961
0962
0963
0964
0965
0966
0967
0968
0969
0970
0971
0972
0973
0974
0975
0976
0977
0978
0979
0980
0981
0982
0983
0984
0985
0986
0987
0988
0989
0990
0991
0992
0993
0994
0995
0996
0997
0998
0999
1000
1110000101
1110000110
1110000111
1110001000
1110001001
1110001010
1110001011
1110001100
1110001101
1110001110
1110001111
1110010000
1110010001
1110010010
1110010011
1110010100
1110010101
1110010110
1110010111
1110011000
1110011001
1110011010
1110011011
1110011100
1110011101
1110011110
1110011111
1110100000
1110100001
1110100010
1110100011
1110100100
1110100101
1110100110
1110100111
1110101000
1110101001
1110101010
1110101011
1110101100
1110101101
1110101110
1110101111
1110110000
1110110001
1110110010
1110110011
1110110100
1110110101
1110110110
1110110111
1110111000
1110111001
1110111010
1110111011
1110111100
1110111101
1110111110
1110111111
1111000000
1111000001
1111000010
1111000011
1111000100
1111000101
1111000110
1111000111
1111001000
1111001001
1111001010
1111001011
1111001100
1111001101
1111001110
1111001111
1111010000
1111010001
1111010010
1111010011
1111010100
1111010101
1111010110
1111010111
1111011000
1111011001
1111011010
1111011011
1111011100
1111011101
1111011110
1111011111
1111100000
1111100001
1111100010
1111100011
1111100100
1111100101
1111100110
1111100111
1111101000
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the AR-3000R from an External Device
Controlling Recording with
Turning the Power On and Off → p. 24
the Control Terminals (Binary
Recording)
Operational Specifications for
Binary Recording
What is Binary Recording/Uses
Phrases are specified by combinations of signals of 0 (OFF)
and 1 (ON) to the Port Nos. 1 through 10 as well as Port No.
11, and record, playback, and erase functions are specified
with combinations of control signals of 0 (OFF) and 1 (ON) to
Port Nos. 13 and 14.
and Applications
You can specify phrases by inputting binary (base 2) signals
to Port Nos. 1 through 11, and perform record, playback, and
erase functions by inputting control signals to Port Nos. 13
and 14. All phrases can be specified with control signals
(ON/OFF). This is convenient when you want to control
Presence or Absence of Phrases
If there is a binary-specified phrase that has already been
recorded, a signal is output from the CONT OUT port. If
there is no phrase, no signal is output.
recording from an external control device.
fig.14-33e
Binary Specification Port 1–11
000001110000
*
During Binary Recording, the CONT OUT port functions as
a port for signals confirming the presence or absence of
phrases. Note that this differs from the normal function of
CONT OUT.
Signal sent to Port
Record
Playback
Erase
Nos. 13 and 14
Phrase A0112
fig.14-35e
Timing Chart (The presence or absence of phrases)
*
*
To conduct binary playback, you will need to obtain a control
device capable of generating binary signals.
Binary Specification
Port No.1–11
Tbcd
Input of binary specifications should be completed in no more
than 50 milliseconds.
Control Out
(the presence or absence
of phrases)
Connecting Equipment
min max
Tbcd
:
Binary Phrase Output Delay Times
-
250
Ports Used in Binary Recording
(msec)
“1-10”: Phrases are specified in binary format using
combinations of 0 (OFF) and 1 (ON).
“11”: 0 (OFF) and 1 (ON) are used to select Card A and Card
B.
“13, 14”: Record, erase, and playback are specified using
combinations of 0 (OFF) and 1 (ON).
Set to “ON” by shorting the above-mentioned port and
“COM (common).”
“CONT OUT”: Outputs signals for confirming the presence
or absence of phrases.
fig.14-34e
Card select
Phrase select
......
12: not use
Common Port
Record/Playback/Erase
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the AR-3000R from an External Device
Recording
13: 0 (OFF)
14: 1 (ON)
Playback
13: 1 (ON)
14: 0 (OFF)
→ While control signals are being input, the specified phrase
→ The specified phrase is played back. Even when control
is recorded. When input of the control signal stops, recording
signals are input continuously, the phrase is played back one
then ends.
time only and then ends.
fig.14-36e
fig.14-37e
Timing Chart (PLAY)
Timing Chart (Rec)
Tbps
Tbph
Tbrs
Tbrh
Binary Specification
Binary Specification
Port No.1–11
Port No.1–11
Tpw
Trw
Port No.13
Tbpd
Port No.14
Tbrd
Tbred
Tvred
Busy Out
Busy Out
Tvpd
Tvrd
Tvbd
AUDIO OUTPUT
AUDIO OUTPUT
min max
min max
Tpw
: Play Pulse Width
20
200
100
-
-
-
-
-
-
Trw
Tbrs
: Play Pulse Width
: Binary Setup Time
300
200
100
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Tbps : Binary Setup Time
Tbph : Binary Hold Time
Tbpd : Busy Delay Time
Tvpd : Audio Delay Time
Tvbd : End Busy Delay Time
Tbrh : Binary Hold Time
Tbrd : Busy Delay Time
Tvrd
Tbred : End Busy Delay Time
Tvred : End Audio Delay Time
300
300
100
300
300
100
100
: Audio Delay Time
(msec)
(msec)
*
Playback does not begin if the binary-specified phrase is empty
(the playback instruction is disabled). When playing back,
specify a phrase that has already been recorded.
*
Recording does not start if there is a binary-specified phrase
that has already been recorded (the recording instruction is
disabled). When recording, either specify an empty phrase or
delete the existing phrase before recording the new one.
Additionally, in Binary Recording, since a make signal is
output from the CONT OUT port when a specified phrase has
already been recorded, this allows confirmation using a
connected external control device.
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the AR-3000R from an External Device
Erase
AR-3000R Settings
14: 1 (ON)
13: 1 (ON)
If a card in AR-2000 format is inserted in either slot A or B (or
both), the AR-3000R can be used only for playback, and it is
not possible to record phrases or make any settings (except
for card conversion). Also, if you insert a card in AR-2000
format into slot A or B (or both) while making settings
(except for card conversion), operation will halt with an error
message, and cannot be resumed until such cards are
removed. To record or edit cards in AR-2000 format on the
AR-3000R, follow the steps in “Card Convert” (p. 78).
→ First, when ON is input to Port No. 14, and then ON is
input to Port No. 13, erasure of the specified phrase begins.
Erasure ends when the signal from the CONT OUT port
(confirming the presence or absence of the phrase) changes to
OFF.
*
Erasure does not begin if the binary-specified phrase is empty
(the playback instruction is disabled). When erasing, specify a
phrase that has already been recorded.
fig.14-38e
Selecting the Control Input Mode
Select “BINARY REC” from the control input modes
(DIRECT PLAY/PROGRAM PLAY/BINARY PLAY/
BINARY REC).
Timing Chart ( Delete)
Tbds
Tpdd
Binary Specification
Port No.1–11
Trdw
*
You cannot achieve Binary Recording merely by connecting a
device to the port. Be sure to set the control input mode to
match the method used for connecting to the ports.
Port No.14
Tpds
Tpdh
Tprd
Port No.13
Control Out
Tbcd
Tbdh
max
Procedure for Setting the Control Input Mode
(the presence or absence
of phrases)
1. Press the MODE button.
The MODE indicator lights up.
min
Trdw : Delete Rec Pulse Width
Tpds : Delete Play Setup Time
Tpdh : Delete Play Hold Time
Tprd : Delete Play Rec Delay Time
Tbds : Delete Binary Setup Time
Tbdh : Delete Binary Hold Time
Tbcd : Binary Phrase Output Delay Time
Tpdd : Play Phrase Output Delay Time
100
50
50
0
200
20
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “5.1 Control Input
Mode,” then press the dial.
3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose “BINARY REC,” then
250
2500 (typ.)
press the dial.
-
fig.14-g12e
(msec)
*
Tpdd: Play phrase output delay time is dependent on the card
used.
4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
Once the settings have been made successfully, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
5. Press the MODE button.
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the AR-3000R from an External Device
Selecting the Phrase Specification
(BINARY 1/BINARY 2)
Phrase Number/Binary Signal Correspondence Table (p. 96)
The phrase number “0015” becomes the binary signal
“0000001111.”
Select the method (BINARY 1 or BINARY 2) used for
specifying the phrase.
BINARY 1: Binary specification normally used.
Port No. 11.
Card A: “0” (OFF)
Card B: “1” (ON)
Phrase Number/Binary Signal Correspondence Table→ p. 96
BINARY 2: Method by which phrases are specified in
sequence from Phrase 0001: Binary 0000000000.
*
If there is no connection to Port No. 11, this is the same as
“OFF,” and Card A is selected.
With the above steps, Phrase No. A0015 is converted to:
About Binary Specification When BINARY 2 is Selected → p.
fig.14-39e
101
Port No.
Input signal → 1
→ 1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
0
6
0
7
0
8
0
9
0
10
0
Procedure for Setting the Phrase Specification
1. Press the MODE button.
Card
Phrase No. (Binary)
The MODE indicator lights up.
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “5.5 Binary Recording,”
• Note that the direction of the phrase numbers (binary)
and port numbers are reversed.
then press the dial.
3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the Phrase Select
• Input of binary specifications should be completed in no
more than 50 milliseconds.
(BINARY 1 or BINARY 2), then press the dial.
fig.14-g13e
Phrase Number/Binary Signal Correspondence Table → p.
96
4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
About Binary Specification When BINARY 2 is
Selected
ENTER button to enable the settings.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
When phrases are selected with “BINARY 2,” Phrase 0001
changes to “0000000000” in the binary specification, with
Once the settings have been made successfully, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
each subsequent specification shifted by one.
fig.14-40e
0001
0000000000
5. Press the MODE button.
Phrase No. 10987654321
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0000000001
0000000010
0000000011
0000000100
0000000101
0000000110
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
0007
0000000111
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
To Specify Phrases With Binary
Signals
0998
0999
1000
1111100110
1111100111
1111101000
Example: Specifying Phrase A0015 (Card: A, Phrase #: 0015)
(* Phrase Specification: When BINARY 1 is Selected)
Substituting the appropriate entries in “Phrase Number/
Binary Signal Correspondence Table” (p. 96) according to the
above figure.
1. Convert the phrase number to a binary signal number.
”0” (OFF)
”1” (ON)
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Another Device with the
AR-3000R (Control Output Terminal)
You can control an external device from the AR-3000R by
Starting Another Device
(Busy Out)
using the output connectors among the screw-on control
terminals on the unit’s rear panel.
The AR-3000R outputs two types of control signals: BUSY
OUT and CONTROL OUT.
What Is a Busy Out Signal?/
This chapter describes how to connect external equipment
Equipment Connections
and make the settings on the AR-3000R.
A Busy Out signal is a signal that is continuously output
from the BUSY OUT port during playback (and during
To confirm phrases when making settings, you can use the
PLAY/STOP button to play and stop phrases and the PAUSE
SELECT dial to move the playback location forward and
backward (audio phrases only). Note that you cannot change
settings during phrase playback.
recording and recording standby) of audio phrases, MIDI
phrases, pattern phrases, and song phrases.
You can use this signal to start an amp or other external
device in sync with phrase playback.
The setting for whether or not the Busy Out signal is to be
output is made separately respective to the following three
situations:
3000R” (p. 19) for more examples of usage of the control
input and output terminals.
• During the delay time set in a phrase (p. 55): in Delay
Time ON/OFF
• During phrase playback: in Phrase Play ON/OFF
• During the repeat interval set in a phrase (p. 57): in
Repeat Int ON/OFF
For information about the specifications of the control input
and output terminals, refer to “Specifications of the Control
Input/Output Terminals” (p. 137).
The setting is made on a system-wide basis (that is, it cannot
be made separately for individual phrases).
The Busy Out specifications are no-voltage/make-contact,
Important Notes on Using the Control Input
and Output Terminals
with a contact capacity of a maximum of DC 30 V at 5 A.
fig.15-01e (Busy Out Connection)
*
The control input and output terminals cannot be used to
switch the power to the AR-3000R on or off.
When making connections to the ports, be careful not to lose
the removed screws. Place the screws out of the reach of
small children. If a screw is accidentally swallowed,
immediately consult a physician.
Turning the Power On and Off → p. 24
Busy Out Signal Output During Playback of
Pattern Phrases and Song Phrases
Both pattern phrases and song phrases (p. 62, p. 65) are each
handled as single phrases, so during playback the Busy Out
signal is output without interruption.
Mode Playback
During Dual Mono mode playback, the left-channel Busy
Out signal is output from the BUSY OUT port, and the right-
channel Busy Out signal is output from the CONT OUT port.
Dual Mono Mode → p. 120
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Another Device with the AR-3000R
3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose “in Delay Time (OFF or
ON),” then press the dial.
fig.15-g01e
AR-3000R Settings
The setting for the Busy Out signal is a system-wide setting
(that is, it is not made separately for individual phrases).
The setting for whether the Busy Out signal is output is made
separately in the following three situations. Choose the one
that matches your usage conditions.
4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose “in Phrase Play (OFF or
ON),” then press the dial.
• In the delay time set in a phrase (p. 55): in Delay Time
ON/OFF
5. Turn the SELECT dial to choose “in Repeat Interval (OFF
• During phrase playback: in Phrase Play ON/OFF
• During the repeat interval set in a phrase (p. 57): in
or ON),” then press the dial.
6. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
Repeat Int ON/OFF
fig.15-02e (Busy Out)
ENTER button to enable the settings.
To quit, use the SELECT dial to choose “NO,” then press the
ENTER button.
During Delay time
During Repeat interval
During Phrase
playback
When you’re finished making the setting, the display returns
to the setting item selection screen.
AUDIO OUTPUT
Close (ON)
Open (OFF)
Busy Out
7. Press the MODE button.
ON : ON : ON
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
Make start
Make finish
ON : ON : OFF
ON : OFF : ON
ON : OFF : OFF
OFF : ON : ON
OFF : ON : OFF
OFF : OFF : ON
OFF : OFF : OFF
*
While making the settings, you can go back to the previous
entry position (highlighted) by using the PAUSE (BACK)
button.
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
Delay Time
Phrase Play
Repeat Int
Inserting into a phrase a delay time equal to the start time for
the amp (the time until sound is played) can help prevent
drop-out at the beginning of the phrase during playback.
Procedure for Making the Setting for Busy Out
Signal Output
1. Press the MODE button.
The MODE indicator lights up.
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “9.5 Busy Out,” then
press the dial.
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Another Device with the AR-3000R
AR-3000R Settings
The setting for the Control Out signal is made separately for
Controlling Another Device
(Control Out)
individual phrases.
When you make the Control Out setting, in addition to
making the setting for whether the signal is output, you can
also set the time until output after phrase playback (the offset
time) to anything from 0 seconds to 59 minutes 59 seconds.
What Is a Control Out Signal?/
Equipment Connections
The Control Out signal is a signal that is output from the
CONT OUT port for one second after playback of audio
phrases, MIDI phrases, pattern phrases, and song phrases.
fig.15-04e (Control Out)
Offset time
You can use it to control external equipment, using the
timing at which phrase playback ends.
Phrase
AUDIO
OUTPUT
Close (ON)
Open (OFF)
You can set the time that is to pass after phrase playback
before output is made to anything from 0 seconds to 59
minutes 59 seconds. The setting is made separately for
individual phrases.
Control Out
1 sec
Make finish
Make start
The Control Out specifications are no-voltage/make-contact,
with a make-contact time of 1 second and a contact capacity
of a maximum of DC 30 V at 5 A.
The setting for Control Out is made with Phrase Settings.
Refer to “Control Out” (p. 59).
Please be aware that if you cancel phrase playback partway
During the offset time, when phrase playback ends due to
the next playback instruction, operation will proceed
according to the setting information for the phrase played
back afterwards. Note that the settings for the first phrase are
deactivated.
through, no Control Out signal is output.
fig.15-03e (CONT OUT Connection)
Turning the Power On and Off → p. 24
Control Out Signal Output During Playback of
Pattern Phrases and Song Phrases
Both pattern phrases and song phrases (p. 62, p. 65) are each
handled as single phrases, so the Control Out signal is output
after phrase playback ends.
Control Out Signal Output During Dual Mono
Mode Playback
Note that no Control Out signal is output during Dual Mono
mode playback (because the Control Out setting (p. 59) is not
valid).
At this time, if the Busy Out setting has been made, the left-
channel Busy Out signal is output from the BUSY OUT port,
and the right-channel Busy Out signal is output from the
CONT OUT port.
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the AR-3000R Using MIDI
Signals (MIDI Control)
Numbers are assigned in semitone steps, with middle C (C4)
What Is MIDI Control?/What You
Can Do with MIDI Control
set at 60 and the numbers from 0 to 127 indicating the
positions of the keys on the keyboard. On the AR-3000R
MIDI stands for “Musical Instrument Digital Interface,” and
is a unified worldwide standard allowing the exchange of
performance information and the like between electronic
instruments and computers. You can connect any device
conforming to the MIDI standard with a MIDI cable, and
then transmit performance data and control the device’s
operation and settings.
these are used to specify phrases.
Note On: This is a message that provides information on
when the keyboard of a MIDI instrument is fingered.
Note On Velocity: This is a message that provides
information on the force (velocity) used when pressing a key.
Note Off: This is a message that provides information on
when the keys of a MIDI instrument are released.
With the AR-3000R, you can do things like those described
below using MIDI signals.
Program Change: This is a message that provides
information for switching sounds on an electronic
instrument. On the AR-3000R, this is used to switch phrase
sets in groups of 100.
● You can record and play back MIDI signals from an
external MIDI device in the same manner as with audio
phrases.
Control Change: MIDI instrument performances use a
variety of controllers, not just for the keyboard. The MIDI
message that conveys such controller action is the Control
Expression messages.
For more about recording and playing back MIDI signals,
refer to “Recording and Playing MIDI Data” (p. 82).
● You can use MIDI signals from an external MIDI device as
control signals for controlling playback of audio and MIDI
phrases.
MIDI Signals
device for remote control and synchronized operation.
• You can use received MMC signals to start and stop
recording and playback of audio phrases (p. 110).
This plays back audio and MIDI phrases using MIDI signals
from an external MIDI device as control signals.
Phrase playback can be controlled by the different types of
MIDI messages, including Note On/Off, Note On Velocity,
Panpot, and Expression.
What Is MMC?/Remote Control from Another Device → p.
110
*
Note that simultaneous recording and simultaneous playback
of audio phrases and MIDI phrases is not possible.
• By using MMC and MTC signals in combination, you
can synchronize playback of audio phrases to video
equipment or the like.
*
Phrases for which RDAC-Mode is set to MODE2 cannot be
synchronized with MTC.
What Is MTC?/Synchronized Playback with Video
Equipment and the Like → p. 112
In addition to these, you can use Exclusive (SysEx) messages
to control starting and stopping for recording and playback,
make settings for recording, and specify phrases. For more
information, refer to MIDI Implementation (p. 139).
Also see the “MIDI Implementation Chart” (p. 144), which
allows easy confirmation of the MIDI messages that the unit
can send and receive, and “MIDI Implementation” (p. 139),
which gives detailed MIDI specifications.
Glossary of Selected MIDI Terms
MIDI messages: These are messages conveyed by MIDI
signals. These messages are necessary for playing
performances on an external MIDI sound generating device.
They include note messages for playing and stopping notes,
as well as Control Change and System Exclusive (SysEx)
messages, which can modify and enhance the expressive
capabilities of performances.
Note number: This is a number assigned to each key (note)
on the keyboard of an electronic musical instrument.
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the AR-3000R Using MIDI Signals (MIDI Control)
Connecting External Equipment
Turning the Power On and Off → p. 24
When Playing Back Audio Phrases Using MIDI
Signals
AR-3000R Settings
fig.16-01e
Selection of MIDI Output (MIDI OUT or
MIDI THRU)
(for MIDI Sequencer)
This changes the function of the MIDI output port.
OUT: This sends MIDI information from the unit. Select this
when you want to play back MIDI phrases or send Exclusive
(SysEx) messages.
THRU: This takes MIDI information from MIDI IN and sends
MIDI OUT
MIDI Sequencer
it out unchanged. MIDI signals from the unit are not output.
Procedure for Setting MIDI Output (MIDI OUT
or MIDI THRU)
MIDI IN
1. Press the MODE button.
The MODE indicator lights up.
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “6.1 MIDI Output,” then
press the dial.
Power Amp.
3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the MIDI output (OUT
or THRU), then press the dial.
fig.16-g01e
4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
When Playing Back MIDI Phrases Using MIDI
Signals
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
fig.16-02e
Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
(for MIDI Sequencer)
5. Press the MODE button.
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
MIDI OUT
MIDI Sequencer
MIDI IN
Note Number Phrase Assignments
(MIDI Note Map)
A Note On message causes the phrase with the
corresponding note number to be played back. You can
choose all phrases by changing the phrases sets in groups of
100 using Program Change messages.
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
You can freely assign phrases to the Program Change 1 note
numbers (128 numbers).
MIDI Sound Module
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the AR-3000R Using MIDI Signals (MIDI Control)
*
*
*
The 1,000 phrases on card A are assigned to Program Changes
21 through 30, and the phrase assignments cannot be changed.
Although you can select phrases from Card A as well as Card
B, note that playback will not work properly if the card
inserted when the phrase was registered is not inserted at
playback. (If the phrase is not saved, the playback signal is
ignored).
The 1,000 phrases on card B are assigned to Program Changes
71 through 80, and the phrase assignments cannot be changed.
For compatibility with the AR-2000 format, 500 phrases on
card A and 500 phrases on card B are assigned to Program
Changes 2 through 6, and 7 through 11, and the phrase
assignments cannot be changed.
Settings When Formatting Cards (in Slot A)
fig.16-03e
*
With Program Change 128, playback of the phrase in progress
is stopped by switching any note number on.
Program Change 1
Note
Number
Phrase
Procedure for Making the MIDI Note Map
Settings
C-1
C#-1
D-1
:
A0001
A0002
A0003
:
1. Press the MODE button.
The MODE indicator lights up.
G9
A0128
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “6.2 MIDI Note Map,”
MIDI Note Map (Phrase Assignments from
Program Changes and Note Numbers)
then press the dial.
fig.16-04e
3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the note number you
Program
Change
Note No.
Phrase No.
want to set, then press the dial.
fig.16-g02e
1
C-1 – G9
You can assign 128 phrases
however you like.
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
C-1 – D#7
C-1 – D#7
C-1 – D#7
C-1 – D#7
C-1 – D#7
C-1 – D#7
C-1 – D#7
C-1 – D#7
C-1 – D#7
C-1 – D#7
A0001 – A0100
A0101 – A0200
A0201 – A0300
A0301 – A0400
A0401 – A0500
A0501 – A0600
A0601 – A0700
A0701 – A0800
A0801 – A0900
A0901 – A1000
• C-1 through G9: Note number
• End: To finish making settings.
• Reset: This restores the settings at the time the card was
formatted.
• Clear: This erases all settings.
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
C-1 – D#7
C-1 – D#7
C-1 – D#7
C-1 – D#7
C-1 – D#7
C-1 – D#7
C-1 – D#7
C-1 – D#7
C-1 – D#7
C-1 – D#7
B0001 – B0100
B0101 – B0200
B0201 – B0300
B0301 – B0400
B0401 – B0500
B0501 – B0600
B0601 – B0700
B0701 – B0800
B0801 – B0900
B0901 – B1000
4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the card containing the
phrase you want to store, then press the dial.
fig.16-g03e
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
C-1 – D#7
C-1 – D#7
C-1 – D#7
C-1 – D#7
C-1 – D#7
C-1 – D#7
C-1 – D#7
C-1 – D#7
C-1 – D#7
C-1 – D#7
A0001 – A0100
A0101 – A0200
A0201 – A0300
A0301 – A0400
A0401 – A0500
B0001 – B0100
B0101 – B0200
B0201 – B0300
B0301 – B0400
B0401 – B0500
5. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the phrase you want to
store, then press the dial.
6. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to assign phrases.
7. To cancel the save process, then in step 3, turn the
SELECT dial to choose END, then press the dial.
fig.16-g04e
128
C-1 – G9
The phrase being plaued back
is stopped.
<Program Change 1>
C-1 C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 G9
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
128 phrase all
8
8. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
<Program Change 21–30, 71–80, 2–11>
C-1 C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 D#7
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
100 phrase all
4
Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the AR-3000R Using MIDI Signals (MIDI Control)
9. Press the MODE button.
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
*
While making the settings, you can go back to the previous
entry position (highlighted) by using the PAUSE (BACK)
button.
Handling of Note Off Signals (Note Trigger)
This sets how Note Off signals are handled during phrase
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
playback through MIDI.
Trigger: Note Off signals are ignored.
Gate: Phrase playback stops when an off signal is received.
With Program Change 128, playback of the phrase in
progress is stopped by switching any note number on.
MIDI Receive Channel (MIDI Channel) Setting
This sets the MIDI receive channel. With MIDI, you can send
different information to a number of MIDI instruments on a
single MIDI cable. For example, when the MIDI channel for
the sending device is set to “1,” then unless the MIDI channel
of the receiving device (here, the AR-3000R) is also set to “1,”
the MIDI message is not transmitted.
Procedure for Making the Note Trigger Setting
1. Press the MODE button.
The MODE indicator lights up.
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “6.5 MIDI Note Trigger,”
then press the dial.
OFF: There is no phrase playback using MIDI signals.
3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the Note Trigger
1 through 16: MIDI signals are received and played back
(TRIGGER or GATE), then press the dial.
fig.16-g06e
only on the selected channel.
ALL: Phrases are played back regardless of the MIDI
channel.
4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
Procedure for Making the MIDI Receive
Channel Settings
ENTER button to enable the settings.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
1. Press the MODE button.
The MODE indicator lights up.
Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “6.4 MIDI Channel,” then
press the dial.
5. Press the MODE button.
3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the MIDI Channel (OFF,
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
1 through 16, or ALL), then press the dial.
fig.16-g05e
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
MIDI Control Signals That the AR-3000R
Can Receive (Receive Messages)
Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
The AR-3000R can receive the MIDI messages described
5. Press the MODE button.
below.
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
Note On Velocity: Volume level when a phrase starts
Panpot (CC10): Change in stereo position on the left and
right channels
Expression (CC11): Change in master volume
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the AR-3000R Using MIDI Signals (MIDI Control)
3000R units.
MIDI Implementation and MIDI Implementation Chart → p.
*
If multiple note numbers are selected for the playback phrase,
only the on or off signal for the lowest note number is output.
139 through p. 145
Procedure for Making the Receive Message
Setting
1. Press the MODE button.
Output is on the MIDI channel set with the MIDI receive
channel (p. 108).
The MODE indicator lights up.
If the MIDI receive channel is set to:
• OFF: There is no output.
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “6.6 MIDI RX Message,”
then press the dial.
• 1 through 16: Only the MIDI signals received on the
selected channel are output.
3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the Note On Velocity
(OFF or ON), then press the dial.
• ALL: Output is on channel 1.
fig.16-g07e
*
When you are controlling a number of AR-3000R units using
note Numbers, set the MIDI note trigger (p. 108) for the
controlled AR-3000R to Trigger.
4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the Panpot (OFF or ON),
*
Even when MIDI phrases are played back, note number on/off
signals are not output.
then press the dial.
5. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the Expression (OFF or
Procedure for Making the MIDI Note Out
Channel Settings
ON), then press the dial.
6. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
1. Press the MODE button.
ENTER button to enable the settings.
The MODE indicator lights up.
To quit without making the setting, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “6.3 MIDI Note Out,”
then press the dial.
Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the MIDI Note Output
(ON or OFF), then press the dial.
7. Press the MODE button.
fig.16-g09e
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
*
While making the settings, you can go back to the previous
entry position (highlighted) by using the PAUSE (BACK)
button.
4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
5. Press the MODE button.
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
Operation Procedures
signals from the external MIDI instrument. When messages
are received, the unit starts playing back the phrases.
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
MIDI Note Out
If MIDI Note Out is set to “ON,” then when an audio phrase
is played back, the MIDI Note Number On/Off signals set in
the MIDI Note Map (p. 107) are output from the MIDI OUT
connector.
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the AR-3000R Using MIDI Signals (MIDI Control)
AR-3000R Settings
Selection of MIDI Output (MIDI OUT or
MIDI THRU)
Synchronizing Operation to
an External MIDI Instrument
– 1 (MMC)
This switches the functioning of the MIDI output connector.
What Is MMC?/Remote Control
from Another Device
OUT: MIDI information from the AR-3000R is sent. Select
this when you want to play back MIDI phrases or send
Exclusive (SysEx) messages.
What is MMC (MIDI Machine Control)?
THRU: This takes MIDI information from MIDI IN and sends
it out unchanged. MIDI information from the AR-3000R itself
is not output.
MMC refers to MIDI messages that were devised in accord
with certain agreements as to how to facilitate the centralized
control of a multiple number of recording devices using one
device. In addition to playback, stopping, and fast
forwarding of songs, you can also select tracks for recording
and carry out other operations merely by operating the one
device which functions as the master. Use of MMC signals
requires that the other devices be capable of remote
operation using MMC signals.
Procedure for Setting MIDI Output
1. Press the MODE button.
The MODE indicator lights up.
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “6.1 MIDI Output,” then
The AR-3000R can work as a remote-control device, starting
and stopping recording and playback of audio phrases when
MMC signals are received from a hard-disk recorder or the
like.
3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the MIDI Output (OUT
or THRU), then press the dial.
fig.16-g09e
MIDI Implementation and MIDI Implementation Chart → p.
139 through p. 145
4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
Connecting External Equipment
You can use the AR-3000R either as an MMC master or an
Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
MMC slave.
In this connection example, the unit is used as a slave.
5. Press the MODE button.
fig.16-05e
Harddisk Recorder
MIDI signal
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
Audio signal
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
MIDI OUT
MMC signal
MIDI IN
Device-specific ID (MIDI Device ID)
Settings
This sets the MIDI device ID (from 1 through 32).
In situations such as when you carry out recording and
editing with a hard-disk recorder and record the finished
results on the AR-3000R, you can control AR-3000R from the
hard-disk recorder.
When you are controlling the unit using MMC, you need to
set both devices to matching device ID numbers. Check the
device ID of the connected external MIDI instrument, then
set the unit to the same device ID.
Procedure for Setting the MIDI Device ID
Turning the Power On and Off → p. 24
1. Press the MODE button.
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the AR-3000R Using MIDI Signals (MIDI Control)
The MODE indicator lights up.
Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “6.7 MIDI Device ID,”
then press the dial.
5. Press the MODE button.
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the MIDI Device ID
(from 1 to 32), then press the dial.
fig.16-g10e
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
Selecting the Sync Source (INTERNAL
or MTC)
This sets the Sync Source. For MMC synchronization, set this
to “INTERNAL.”
Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
5. Press the MODE button.
INTERNAL: The slave device operates according to the AR-
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
3000R’s internal clock.
MTC: The unit operates according to MIDI time code
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
information from the master device.
Note that when Sync Source is set to MTC, there is no
operation unless MTC information is input from the external
MIDI instrument.
MMC mode (OFF/MASTER/SLAVE)
Procedure for Setting the Sync Source
This selects master or slave for MMC synchronization.
1. Press the MODE button.
OFF: MMC information is not sent or received.
The MODE indicator lights up.
MASTER: MMC information is sent. The unit becomes the
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “6.9 MTC,” then press the
master of the external MIDI instrument.
dial.
SLAVE: MMC information is received. The unit becomes the
3. Turn the SELECT dial to set Sync Source to
slave of the external MIDI instrument.
“INTERNAL,” then press the dial.
fig.16-g12e
Procedure for Setting the MMC Mode
1. Press the MODE button.
The MODE indicator lights up.
• If you are continuing by making the setting for “Sync
Out,” proceed to step 4 of the procedure for setting sync
out (p. 117).
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “6.8 MMC Mode,” then
press the dial.
3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the MMC Mode (OFF,
To finish making the setting, press the ENTER button.
MASTER, or SLAVE), then press the dial.
4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
fig.16-g11e
ENTER button to enable the settings.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the AR-3000R Using MIDI Signals (MIDI Control)
5. Press the MODE button.
Synchronizing Operation to
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
an External MIDI Instrument
– 2 (MMC and MTC)
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
What Is MTC?/Synchronized
Playback with Video Equipment
and Other Devices
What Is MTC (MIDI Time Code)?
Operation Procedures
MMC Slave
This comprises MIDI messages developed to allow MIDI
devices to be synchronized with precision. It differs from
MIDI Clock in that it displays the absolute time. The master
device transmits the current absolute time (in hours/
minutes/seconds/frames from the start), and the time of the
slave device is advanced to conform with it. Use of MMC
signals requires that the other device is capable of
synchronization using MTC.
When you have finished making the settings, operate the
connected master device. You can control the unit remotely.
MMC Master
When you have finished making the settings, operate the
unit. You can control the connected slave device remotely.
With the AR-3000R, you can combine MMC and MTC signals
to synchronize playback of audio phrases with a digital
mixer, video equipment, or other devices.
Types of MTC (Frame Rate)
The MTC types (frame rates) you can select with the AR-
3000R are shown below. When you are synchronizing
operation using MTC, you need to set both devices to
matching frame rates. Check the specifications of the
connected external MIDI instrument, then make the settings.
30: This is 30 frames per second, non-drop format. It is used
for audio equipment such as analog tape recorders, and
NTSC-format black and white video.
29N: This is 29.97 frames per second, non-drop format. It is
used for NTSC-format color video.
29D: This is 29.97 frames per second, drop format. It is used
for NTSC-format color video for broadcast use.
25: This is 25 frames per second. It is used for SECAM- and
PAL-format video and audio equipment, and for motion
pictures.
24: This is 24 frames per second. It is used for video and
audio equipment in the U.S.A., and for motion pictures.
Selection of MTC Type (30/29N/29D/25/24) → p. 115
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the AR-3000R Using MIDI Signals (MIDI Control)
Drop Frame and Non-drop Frame
Connecting External Equipment
You can the AR-3000R as an MTC master or as an MTC slave.
There are two types of time codes used by NTSC-format
video-cassette recorders: drop frame, in which time codes are
not continuous, and non-drop frame, in which time codes are
continuous. To achieve compatibility with the NTSC color
video standard, drop frame drops the first two frames of
every minute except the 10th, 20th, 30th, 40th, and 50th
In this connection example, the unit is used as a slave.
fig.16-07e
Control signal
MIDI signal
Audio signal
minutes.
fig.16-06e
Non-Drop Frame (29N)
Monitor
00m59s
01m00s
Video playback device
... 25 26 27 28 29 00 01 02 03 04 05f ...
Video Time code
Video MIDI Sync Interface
MIDI OUT
MTC, MMC signal
Drop Frame (29D)
01m00s
00m59s
MIDI IN
... 25 26 27 28 29 02 03 04 05 06 07f ...
Because continuous frames are easier to work with, non-drop
frame is used in general video and music production.
Conversely, drop frame is used in television stations and the
like, where time codes must match actual clock times.
Power Amp.
Synchronization by means of MTC is not possible when the
Dual Mono mode on the AR-3000R is set to “ON.”
You can play back audio phrases in sync with video. Fast
forwarding, rewinding, and playback from whatever
position you want is also supported.
MTC synchronization may not be correct when Loop Play for
a phrase is set to “ON.” In such cases, use with Loop Play set
to “OFF.”
Turning the Power On and Off → p. 24
Synchronization with MTC is not possible for phrases for
which MODE2 is set to RDAC-MODE.
AR-3000R Settings (When the
AR-3000R Is the Slave)
Selection of MIDI Output (MIDI OUT or
MIDI THRU)
This switches the functioning of the MIDI output connector.
OUT: This sends MIDI information from the unit. Select this
when you want to play back MIDI phrases or send Exclusive
(SysEx) messages.
THRU: This takes MIDI information from MIDI IN and sends
it out unchanged. MIDI information from the AR-3000R itself
is not output.
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the AR-3000R Using MIDI Signals (MIDI Control)
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
Procedure for Setting MIDI Output
1. Press the MODE button.
Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
The MODE indicator lights up.
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “6.1 MIDI Output,” then
5. Press the MODE button.
press the dial.
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
3. Turn the SELECT dial to set MIDI Output to “THRU,”
then press the dial.
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
fig.16-g13e
4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
MMC Mode (OFF/MASTER/SLAVE)
This sets the MMC mode to “SLAVE.”
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
OFF: MMC information is not sent or received.
Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
MASTER: MMC information is sent. The unit becomes the
master of the external MIDI instrument.
5. Press the MODE button.
SLAVE: MMC information is received. The unit becomes the
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
slave of the external MIDI instrument.
Procedure for Setting the MMC Mode
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
1. Press the MODE button.
The MODE indicator lights up.
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “6.7 MMC Mode,” then
press the dial.
3. Turn the SELECT dial to set the MMC Mode to
Device-specific ID (MIDI Device ID)
Settings
“SLAVE,” then press the dial.
fig.16-g15e
This sets the MIDI device ID (from 1 through 32). When you
are controlling the unit using MMC and MTC, you need to
set both devices to matching device ID numbers. Check the
device ID of the connected external MIDI instrument, then
set the unit to the same device ID.
4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
Procedure for Setting the MIDI Device ID
Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
1. Press the MODE button.
The MODE indicator lights up.
5. Press the MODE button.
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “6.6 MIDI Device ID,”
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
then press the dial.
3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the MIDI Device ID
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
(from 1 to 32), then press the dial.
fig.16-g14e
4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the AR-3000R Using MIDI Signals (MIDI Control)
Procedure for Setting the MTC Type
1. Press the MODE button.
Selecting the Sync Source (INTERNAL or MTC)
This sets the Sync Source to “MTC.”
INTERNAL: The slave device operates according to the AR-
The MODE indicator lights up.
3000R’s internal clock. Select this to make the unit the master.
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “6.9 MTC,” then press the
MTC: The unit operates according to MIDI time code
information from the master device. Select this to make the
unit the slave.
dial.
3. Press the SELECT dial to advance the input location
(highlighted) to “MTC Type.”
4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the MTC type (30, 29N,
29D, 25, or 24), then press the dial.
Note that when Sync Source is set to MTC, there is no
operation unless MTC information is input from the external
MIDI instrument.
fig.16-g17e
Procedure for Setting the Sync Source
• If you are continuing by making the setting for “MTC
Error Level,” proceed to step 4 of the procedure for
setting the MTC Error Level (p. 115).
1. Press the MODE button.
The MODE indicator lights up.
To finish making the setting, press the ENTER button.
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “6.9 MTC,” then press the
dial.
5. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
3. Turn the SELECT dial to set the Sync Source to “MTC,”
then press the dial.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
fig.16-g16e
Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
• If you are continuing by making the setting for “Sync
Out,” proceed to step 4 of the procedure for setting Sync
Out (p. 117).
6. Press the MODE button.
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
To finish making the setting, press the ENTER button.
*
While making the settings, you can go back to the previous
entry position (highlighted) by using the PAUSE (BACK)
button.
4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
5. Press the MODE button.
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
Selecting the MTC Error Level (0 to 10)
This sets the interval at which the MTC reception status is
checked (from 0 to 10). When you are conducting
synchronization with the unit as the slave, this constantly
checks whether the unit is correctly sending MIDI time
codes. When MIDI time codes are not sent continuously, it is
determined that there is a problem with MTC
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a message
asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting process
appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the ENTER
button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all setting
synchronization, and synchronized operation stops.
Selecting the MTC Type (30/29N/29D/25/24)
The MTC error level sets the reference standard for this
determination. Larger values increase the degree of error
tolerance, making slave playback possible even when there
are minor problems in receiving MIDI time codes.
This selects the MTC type (frame rate).
Check the specifications of the connected external MIDI
instrument, then make the settings.
Types of MTC (Frame Rates) → p. 112
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the AR-3000R Using MIDI Signals (MIDI Control)
Procedure for Setting the MTC Error Level
Operation Procedures
When you have finished making the settings, carry out
playback on the connected master device. Phrase playback in
sync with received MIDI time codes starts.
1. Press the MODE button.
The MODE indicator lights up.
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “6.9 MTC,” then press the
dial.
When Sync Source is set to MTC, the indicators on the front
panel of the unit light up as shown below.
3. Press the SELECT dial to advance the input location
fig.16-08e
(highlighted) to “MTC Error Level.”
PLAY button PAUSE button
4. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the MTC Error Level
During Pause
Lights in green Lights in orange
Lights in orange
(from 0 to 10), then press the dial.
During Rec standby Lights in red
fig.16-g18e
• Playback is paused when MTC (Full messages; p. 139) is
received, or the PLAY button is pressed.
• To enter recording standby under the control of MTC,
press the PLAY button while holding down the STOP
button, then press the PAUSE button again.
5. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
A screen like the following appears during playback.
fig.16-08ae
Remaining time for phrase playback
Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
6. Press the MODE button.
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
MIDI Time Code
*
While making the settings, you can go back to the previous
entry position (highlighted) by using the PAUSE (BACK)
button.
Note that there is no operation unless MIDI time codes are
input from the external MIDI instrument.
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the setting
process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then press the
ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen, and all
setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be discarded.
AR-3000R Settings (When the
AR-3000R Is the Master)
Selection of MIDI Output (MIDI OUT or
MIDI THRU)
This switches the functioning of the MIDI output connector.
Here, select “OUT.”
OUT: This sends MIDI information from the unit. Select this
when you want to play back MIDI phrases, send Exclusive
(SysEx) messages, or make the AR-3000R the master during
synchronization using MIDI signals.
THRU: This takes MIDI information from MIDI IN and sends
it out unchanged. MIDI information from the AR-3000R itself
is not output.
Procedure for Setting MIDI Output (MIDI OUT
or MIDI THRU)
For setting procedure, refer to p. 110.
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the AR-3000R Using MIDI Signals (MIDI Control)
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “6.9 MTC,” then press the
Device-specific ID (MIDI Device ID)
Settings
dial.
are controlling an external MIDI instrument using MMC and
MTC, you need to set both devices to matching device ID
numbers. Check the device ID of the connected external
MIDI instrument, then set the unit to the same device ID.
3. Press the SELECT dial to advance the input location
(highlighted) to “Sync Out.”
4. Turn the SELECT dial to set Sync Out to “MTC,” then
press the dial.
fig.16-g23e
Procedure for Setting the MIDI Device ID
For setting procedure, refer to p. 114.
• If you are continuing by making the setting for “MTC
Type,” proceed to step 4 of the procedure for setting the
MTC Type (p. 115).
MMC mode (OFF/MASTER/SLAVE)
This sets the MMC Mode to “MASTER.”
OFF: MMC information is not sent or received.
To finish making the setting, press the ENTER button.
MASTER: MMC information is sent. The unit becomes the
5. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
master of the external MIDI instrument.
ENTER button to enable the settings.
SLAVE: MMC information is received. The unit becomes the
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
slave of the external MIDI instrument.
Procedure for Setting the MMC Mode
Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
For setting procedure, refer to p. 111.
6. Press the MODE button.
Selecting the Sync Source (INTERNAL
or MTC)
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
This sets the Sync Source to “INTERNAL.”
*
While making the settings, you can go back to the previous
entry position (highlighted) by using the PAUSE (BACK)
button.
INTERNAL: The slave device operates according to the AR-
3000R’s internal time control. Select this to make the unit the
master.
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
MTC: The unit operates according to MIDI time code
information from the master device. Select this to make the
unit the slave.
Note that when Sync Source is set to “MTC,” there is no
operation unless MTC information is input from the external
MIDI instrument.
25/24)
This selects the MTC type (frame rate).
Procedure for Setting the Sync Source
Check the specifications of the connected external MIDI
instrument, then make the settings.
For setting procedure, refer to p. 111.
Selecting Sync Out (OFF or MTC)
This sets Sync Out to “MTC.”
Types of MTC (Frame Rates) → p. 112
OFF: MIDI time codes are not sent.
Procedure for Setting the MTC Type
MTC: MIDI time codes are sent. Select this when you are
operating a slave device using the unit’s MTC.
For setting procedure, refer to p. 115.
Procedure for Setting Sync Out
Operation Procedures
When you have finished making the settings, play back a
phrase on the unit. The connected slave device carries out
synchronized playback.
1. Press the MODE button.
The MODE indicator lights up.
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the AR-3000R Using MIDI Signals (MIDI Control)
*
*
While making the settings, you can go back to the previous
MTC Offset Setting
This adjusts the timing when you are using MTC to
synchronize operation of the unit and an external MIDI
instrument.
entry location (highlighted) by pressing the PAUSE (BACK)
button.
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
Settings When Synchronizing Operation of the Unit to the
MIDI Time Code from an External MIDI Instrument
When you’re operating the unit on receiving the MIDI Time
Code from an external MIDI instrument, you can effect
playback on the unit at any time you want.
For instance, if you want to play back a phrase when the
MTC time on the external MIDI instrument is
“01h00m00s00f,” set the offset to “01h00m00s00f.”
Settings When Synchronizing an External MIDI
Instrument to the MIDI Time Code from the Unit
When you’re operating an external instrument on receiving
the MIDI Time Code from the unit, you can effect playback
on the external instrument at any time you want.
For instance, if you want to play back a phrase on the unit,
then after the elapse of “00h00m10s00f” effect playback on
the external MIDI instrument at “00h00m00s00f,” set the
offset to “23h59m50s00f.”
“00h00m00s00f” - “00h00m10s00f” = “23h59m50s00f”
When the calculated time value is negative, add
“24h00m00s00f.”
Procedure for Setting the MTC Offset
1. Press the MODE button.
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “6.9 MTC,” then press the
dial.
3. Press the SELECT dial and advance the entry location
(highlighted) to “Offset.”
4. Turn the SELECT dial to set the offset (time), then press
the dial.
Each press of the BACK button moves the cursor (highlighted) in the
sequence of f → s → m → h.
5. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
6. Press the MODE button.
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the AR Using the RS-232C
Connector
Procedure for Setting the Baud Rate
What’s the RS-232C Connector?/
1. Press the MODE button.
What You Can Do with the RS-
The MODE indicator lights up.
232C Connector
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “7.1 Baud Rate,” then
The RS-232C connector is a connector used to connect to a
computer or other peripheral equipment. The AR-3000R is
equipped with a D-sub 9-pin type RS-232C connector. With
the AR-3000R, you can control the AR-3000R from an
external control device such as a computer or touch panel by
means of an RS-232C cable connection.
press the dial.
3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the Baud Rate (4800,
9600, 19200 or 38400), then press the dial.
fig.17-g01e
For more information about examples of using the RS-232C
connector, also see “Using the RS-232C Connector” (p. 21).
4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the setting.
● Controlling the AR-3000R Using a Computer
ENTER button.
You can do things like controlling starting and stopping of
recording or playback (for audio recording only), make
settings during recording, specify phrases, and copy and
delete phrases and cards.
When you’re finished making the setting, the display returns
to the setting item selection screen.
5. Press the MODE button.
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
For more about the specifications of the RS-232C connector, see
“RS-232C Connector Specifications” in Appendices (p. 137).
*
Pressing the MODE button while making the setting displays
a prompt asking you whether you want to quit making the
setting. Note that choosing “YES” and pressing the ENTER
button returns you to the usual screen, discarding any
settings made up to that point.
Connecting Equipment
fig.17-01e (RS-232C Connection)
Available Documentation for the
RS-232C
In addition to the owner’s manual, “RS-232C Reference
Notes” are available for purchase as reference materials that
cover RS-232C connector control. The PDF file can be
downloaded free of charge from the following URL.
RS-232C connector of Personal computer
RS-232C cable
● The RS-232C Reference Notes cover the following topics:
• Setup
Turning the Power On and Off → p. 24
Baud Rate Setting
Set the RS-232C communication speed (baud rate). The
available baud rates are 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 bps.
Choose one that matches the usage conditions.
• Overviews, detailed descriptions, and lists of commands
• Examples of usage algorithms
http://www.rssamerica.com/
*
Be sure to check the baud rate of the computer you’re using
before making the setting.
*
The setting for 38,400 bps is for compatibility with legacy
models (the AR-3000/ 2000). However, it is a value for the
communication speed that is not defined by the RS-232C
standards. Make this setting as necessary when using a legacy
model by means of card conversion.
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing Two Units’s Worth of Data on
the Left and Right (Dual Mono Mode)
If a phrase unsuited to Dual Mono playback is specified on
What Is the Dual Mono Mode?/
Equipment Connections
either the left or right channel in the course of sequential
phrase playback, it results in incorrect Dual Mono playback.
The Dual Mono mode is a feature for playing different mono
To ensure reliable Dual Mono playback, specify the playback
phrases with care.
audio phrases independently on the left and right channels.
By playing odd-numbered phrases (A0001, A0003,... or
B0001, B0003,...) from the left channel and even-numbered
phrases (A0002, A0004,... or B0002, B0004,...) from the right
channel, you can play back two units’s worth of data on a
single unit.
Dual Mono playback can be made possible by converting
stereo phrases to mono phrases. You can also make Dual
Mono playback possible for phrases having different RDAC-
modes by converting them after recording to make them
uniform. For more about how to convert phrases, refer to
“Phrase Convert” (p. 78).
You can also play back separate phrases on the left and right
channels either simultaneously, or shifted.
fig.18-01e (What Is the Mono Mode?)
The following phrase information has no
effect during playback.
● 1.5 Loop Play
Odd-numbered
phrases
Even-numbered
phrases
L
R
Control Output During Dual Mono Mode
Playback
A0001
A0003
A0002
A0004
B0001
B0002
During Dual Mono mode playback, the left-channel Busy
Out signal is output from the BUSY OUT control port, and
the right-channel Busy Out signal is output from the CONT
OUT control port.
Note that the Dual Mono mode is subject to various
conditions that you should be aware of before you use the
mode.
*
Note that no Control Out signal is output (because the
Control Out setting (p. 59) is not valid).
On the AR-2000/100 (legacy models), this Dual Mono mode
is named the “Channel Playback mode.” As you use it, keep
in mind that it is the same feature.
AR-3000R Settings
Set the Dual Mono Mode to “ON (MONO 2ch).”
Procedure for Setting the Dual Mono Mode
Conditions for Simultaneous Playback in Dual
Mono Mode
1. Press the MODE button.
The MODE indicator lights up.
● Phrases Whose Recording Type Is Mono
● RDAC-Grade and RDAC-Mode Must Be Uniform
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “9.1 Dual Mono Mode,”
then press the dial.
Specifying Phrases Like the Following Result in
Dual Mono Mode Playback That May Not Be
Correct
3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose Dual Mono Mode (ON
(MONO 2ch)), then press the dial.
fig.18-g01e
● MIDI Phrases, Song Phrases
→ These are treated as empty phrases.
● Pattern Phrases Containing MIDI Phrases
→ These are treated as empty phrases, and the unit searches
for and plays back the next phrase.
4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
● Phrases Whose Recording Type Is Stereo
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
→ Dual Mono playback is canceled, and the specified phrase
is output in stereo (L/R).
When you’re finished making the setting, the display returns
to the setting item selection screen.
● Phrases for Which RDAC-Grade and RDAC-Mode Are
Different
5. Press the MODE button.
→ The phrase already being played back is stopped, and the
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
next specified phrase is played.
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing Two Units's Worth of Data on the Left and Right
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
During Direct Playback
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
Odd-numbered phrases are output by direct playback from
output L (left), and even-numbered phrases are output by
direct playback from output R (right). The order of priority of
the control input connectors may vary depending on how
phrases are assigned to the control input terminals. To
facilitate understanding, the explanations in this section
assume that the assigned phrase numbers correspond to the
Operation Procedures
port numbers.
fig.18-02e (Monaural and Direct Charts)
Dual Mono Playback Through Manual
Operation
1
2
3
4
5
16
A0016
Port No.
Phrase
Output jack
...
...
...
A0001 A0002 A0003 A0004 A0005
L
R
L
R
L
R
You can perform manual playback, in the same way as for
When you send a Stop input signal, playback stops
simultaneously for the L and R channels.
ordinary stereo playback.
1. Insert a card containing recorded information into a slot.
*
*
Input a trigger signal to the control signal.
2. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the phrase number to
play.
fig.18-g01e
Do not simultaneously input more than one control input
allocated to the same output.
● Normal Playback
ig.18-04e (Ordinary Playback Example 2)
Port 1
L ch
R ch
Port 2
Port 3
*
*
To switch between card slots A and B, press the SELECT dial.
To switch between L (left) and R (right), press the ENTER
button.
A0003
A0002
A0003 Interrupted
A0001
Output L
Output R
3.
• Pressing the PLAY button plays back a phrase. During
playback of the phrase, the PLAY indicator lights up in
green.
• Because port Nos. 1 and 3 are allocated to output L,
depending on the port priority, playback of A0003 is
halted and A0001 is played.
*
The phrase whose phrase number is highlighted is played back.
• Because port No. 2 is allocated to output R, A0002
continues to be played back even during playback of
A0003 or A0001.
• Pressing the STOP button ends playback.
• During playback, you can choose the next song to play
(without stopping the phrase being played) by turning
the SELECT dial.
● First-In Playback
fig.18-03e (Ordinary Playback Example 1)
Ignored
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Please be aware that you cannot pause Dual Mono playback.
Dual Mono Playback Through Control
Input
A0001
Output L
A0002
Output R
You can perform playback through control input, in the same
• Because port Nos. 1 and 3 are allocated to output L,
depending on the port priority, signals input to 3 are not
valid.
way as for ordinary stereo playback.
The settings for control-input playback basically act
independently for each channel.
• Because port No. 2 is allocated to output R, A0002 is
played back even during playback of A0001.
For more information about the operation of playback with
control input terminals, see also “Controlling the AR-3000R
from an External Device (Control Input)” (p. 85).
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing Two Units's Worth of Data on the Left and Right
● Last-In Playback
When you send a Stop input signal, playback stops
Port 1
simultaneously for the L and R channels.
● When Level is set to “ON” and Edge is set to “OFF”
Port 2
Port 3
A0001
A0002
A0003
Binary Signal
Port 1-11
Ignored
A0001
A0002
A0001 Interrupted
A0003
Output L
Output R
START port
A0001
A0003 A0003
Output L
Output R
A0002
• Because port Nos. 1 and 3 are allocated to output L,
depending on the port priority, playback of A0001 is
halted and A0003 is played back.
• Any new Start signal input during A0002 playback is not
valid.
• Because port No. 2 is allocated to output R, A0002
continues to be played back even during playback of
A0003 or A0001.
• Playback is repeated while binary is specified for A0003
and the Start signal is continuously input.
● When Level is set to “OFF” and Edge is set to “ON”
● Sequence Playback
A0001
A0002
Binary Signal
Port 1-11
Port 1
Ignored
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
START port
Output L
Output R
A0001
A0002
• A0001 is played back only once.
A0001
A0002
A0003
A0004
A0005
A0005
Output L
Output R
• A0002 is played back only once, then ends, even when
binary is specified for A0002 and the Start signal is
continuously input.
A0005
: Stereo phrase
A0004 Interrupted
Dual Mono Playback Through MIDI
Signals
• The control signals for port Nos. 3 and 4 are stored in
memory (reserved), and after playback of A0001 and
A0002 ends, A0003 and A0004 are played.
You can perform playback through MIDI signals, in the same
way as for ordinary stereo playback. Playback starts when a
MIDI Note On message is received. Odd-numbered phrases
are played back from the L (left) channel, and even-
numbered phrases are played back from the R (right)
channel.
• Because A0005 is a stereo phrase, playback of A0004 is
stopped, and the specified phrase is played back in
stereo (left and right).
During Program Playback
*
Because playback is performed in reverse priority, the last-
receive Note On message takes priority.
Odd-numbered phrases are output by program playback
from output L (left), and even-numbered phrases are output
by program playback from output R (right).
*
Setting Note Trigger to “Gate” makes it possible to send stop
instructions independently to the left and right channels.
*
Because Start signals are ignored during playback of one
phrase, simultaneous playback of output L and R is not
possible.
Dual Mono Playback Through the RS-
232C Connector
When you send a Stop input signal, playback stops
simultaneously for the L and R channels.
In a manner similar to ordinary stereo playback, you can also
obtain playback through the RS-232C connector. Phrase
playback-sequence information is allocated to the
corresponding dedicated buffer according to whether the
phrase number is odd or even, and playback on the left and
right channels starts simultaneously according to the
respective playback sequence.
START port
A0001
A0003
Output L
Output R
A0002
During Binary Playback
*
Sending a playback-stop instruction stops playback
simultaneously on the left and right channels.
Odd-numbered phrases are output by binary playback from
output L (left), and even-numbered phrases are output by
binary playback from output R (right).
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Synchronized Recording and Playback
with Multiple AR Units (AR-LINK)
fig.19-02e
What Is AR-LINK?/What You Can
Do Using AR-LINK
MIDI signal
AUDIO signal
The AR-LINK connector is a special transmission connector
Video playback device
for AR units, used for creating completely synchronized
recording and playback with multiple AR-3000R devices.
The connectors feature special leads for commands and
master clock, allowing synchronization with sampling
MMC Mode: MASTER
MTC Sync Source: INTERNAL
frequency precision.
MTC Sync Out: MTC
With one AR-3000R as the master, you can link up to 31 other
AR-3000R/3000/200 units (for a total of 32 devices) to get 64-
MIDI OUT
channel multitrack recording and playback.
MTC, MMC signal
However, this system allow recording and playback only of
Power Amp.
MIDI IN
audio phrases (Song phrases, Pattern phrases, and MIDI
phrases cannot be handled).
AR-LINK
Master
Synchronized Audio Phrase
Playback with AR-LINK
Signals
MMC Mode: SLAVE
MTC Sync Source: MTC
AR-LINK
Slave
Example of Connecting to an
External Device
● Use MIDI to send a hard disk recorder’s operation data to
the master AR-3000R. Connecting four slave AR units in a
chain then allows you to get 8-channel multitrack recording.
Up to 31 AR-3000R/200s
(for a total of 32) can be linked.
fig.19-01e
MIDI signal
Audio signal
Harddisk Recorder
AR-LINK
Slave
Also refer to “Synchronizing Operation to an External MIDI
Instrument – 2 (MMC and MTC)” (p. 112).
MIDI OUT
MTC, MMC signal
Audio patch bay
MIDI IN
LINE IN
Do not connect a cable to AR-LINK IN on the AR-3000R set
as the master.
AR-LINK
Master
LINE IN
AR-LINK
Slave
When an AR-200 is serving as a slave, AR-LINK
synchronization cannot be accomplished if the master
chooses a B slot phrase.
LINE IN
LINE IN
During AR-LINK playback, the “Repeat Play,” “Loop Play,”
and “Control Out” settings made for the phrases have no
effect.
AR-LINK
Slave
● Use MIDI to send signals from a video device to the master
AR-3000R. You can chain 31 slave AR units to synchronize
images and phrases.
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Synchronized Recording and Playback with Multiple AR Units
fig.19-g03e
Unit Settings
REC Standby
(Slave)
Setting the AR-LINK Mode
OFF: There is no synchronization using AR-LINK. Even
During recording
(Slave)
when this is set to Off, signals input to AR-LINK IN are
output from AR-LINK OUT.
*
*
When you set the master, all slave AR units connected by AR-
LINK are set to the same value.
MASTER: This enables operation as the AR-LINK master.
SLAVE: This enables operation as the AR-LINK slave. Use
this settings for the second and later AR units connected
using AR-LINK.
During recording, you can stop the slave AR units
individually, by operating their respective panels.
Procedure for Setting the AR-LINK Mode
Playback Procedure
1. Press the MODE button.
For the master, this is the same as the usual playing back
procedure. The slave AR units operate according to the
The MODE indicator lights up.
operation of the master.
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “8.1 AR-LINK Mode,”
fig.19-g04e
then press the dial.
During playback
(Master)
3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose the AR-LINK Mode
(OFF, MASTER, or SLAVE), then press the dial.
fig.19-g02e
*
*
During playback, you can stop the slave AR units
individually, by operating their respective panels.
If independent playback is carried out on the slave AR-3000R,
the indication for the fact that it is an AR-LINK slave
disappears.
4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
Phrases used for synchronized AR-LINK playback must all
be the same Card Slot, REC Type, RDAC-Grade, and RDAC-
Mode. If a card having a different setting than the master is
inserted into an AR unit, the AR unit will not operate. In
such instances, connected slave AR units thereafter are not
affected.
Once the settings have been successfully modified, you’re
returned to the setting item selection screen.
5. Press the MODE button.
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
*
If you press the MODE button while making settings, a
message asking you to confirm that you want to exit the
setting process appears. Note that if you choose “YES,” then
press the ENTER button, you are returned to the usual screen,
and all setting changes you’ve made up to that point will be
discarded.
Please be aware that a second or subsequent AR unit
connected through AR-LINK cannot be set as the master.
AR-LINK signals are not sent from the master in cases like
the ones below.
AR-LINK Master
AR-LINK Slave
• When the Dual Mono mode is “ON”
• When the master is playing back a MIDI phrase, song
phrase, or pattern phrase
Recording Procedure
For the master, these are the same as the usual recording
procedure (p. 41) and recording settings (p. 42). The slave AR
units operate according to the operation of the master.
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Other Useful Functions During Phrase
Playback
This section highlights some other functions that can be
useful when you play phrases. Use them to match the
situation.
Line Thru Output Specifications
The following output specifications apply, depending on the
Line Thru settings.
fig.20-02e (Line Thru Specifications)
During Phrase
Playback
During Phrase
Playback
AR PHRASE
OUTPUT
Line Out (Thru) Setting
During Phrase Playback
When On
When On (0%)
When On (50%)
Handy Uses of Line Thru
With the AR-3000R, you can take audio from LINE IN, mix it
during phrase playback, and mixed it from Line Out (or Line
When On
(100%)
Sound input to LINE IN
Thru).
fig.20-01e (Line Thru Connection)
CD player or other sound playback device
LINE THRU
●When fade-out or fade-in settings have been made
During Phrase
Playback
During Phrase
Playback
AR PHRASE
OUTPUT
When On (0%)
LINE IN
(ANALOG)
LINE THRU
Fade-Out
(TIME)
BALANCED OUTPUT
Fade-In
(TIME)
Sound input to LINE IN
+
AR sound phrase
When Using Microphone Input
Power Amp.
Audio from the Mic jack is sent to Line Out only during
recording or recording standby.
You cannot output audio from the Mic jack during phrase
playback or while stopped, even when “ON” is selected for
Line Thru.
This is useful when you want to do things like taking music
from LINE IN and layering it with narration phrases as
background music.
Line Thru Settings
You can also make the LINE IN sound fade out or in.
Make the settings for Line Thru.
Line throughput is possible only for signals connected to the
LINE IN jacks (the DIGITAL IN jack cannot be used for this).
Also refer to “Line Thru Output Specifications.”
• Volume: Set the Line Thru output volume level during
phrase playback within the range of 0 to 100%. The
throughput volume level output when phrase playback
is stopped is 100%. When you set the volume level to 0%,
nothing is output to Line Thru during phrase playback.
*
You can make the setting for Thru Volume only when Line
Thru is set to “ON.”
• Fade Out: This makes the Line Thru input fade out
when phrase playback starts.
• Fade In: This makes the Line Thru input fade in when
phrase playback ends.
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Other Useful Functions During Phrase Playback
*
You can make the setting for Fade Out or Fade In only when
Line Thru is set to “ON.”
*
*
While making the settings, you can go back to the previous
entry position (highlighted) by using the PAUSE (BACK)
button.
Pressing the MODE button while making the setting displays
a prompt asking you whether you want to quit making the
setting. Note that choosing “YES” and pressing the ENTER
button returns you to the usual screen, discarding any
settings made up to that point.
While making the Line Thru settings, you can play the
phrase selected before you made the settings by pressing the
PLAY button. This lets you verify the Line Thru operation as
you make the settings.
Procedure for Making Line Thru Settings
Adjusting the Sound Quality
During Audio Phrase
Playback (Equalizer)
1. Press the MODE button.
The MODE indicator lights up.
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “9.2 Line Thru,” then
press the dial.
The equalizer can be used to obtain the desired sound quality
for the playback of audio phrases. A setting of 0 dB produces
flat characteristics (the state of the original sound).
3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose Line Thru (OFF or ON),
then press the dial.
fig.20-g01e
• Low: This adjusts the sound quality of the low band.
This performs adjustment within a range of -12 dB to +12
dB (Low Gain), with a reference frequency of 200 Hz or
400 Hz.
4. Turn the SELECT dial to set the Thru Volume (0 to
100%), then press the dial.
• High: This adjusts the sound quality of the high band.
This performs adjustment within a range of -12 dB to +12
dB (High Gain), with a reference frequency of 3 kHz or 6
kHz.
*
You can make the setting for Thru Volume only when you
have selected Line Thru “ON.”
5. Turn the SELECT dial to make the setting for Fade Out
• Attenuation: Depending on the equalizer settings, sound
may be distorted. If this happens, set Attenuation within
a range of -12 dB to 0 dB. However, note that the output
level also drops when this value is set to anything other
than 0 dB.
(time: 00.5 sec to 59.9 sec), then press the dial.
fig.20-g02e
*
You can make the setting for Fade Out only when you have
selected Line Thru “ON.”
Boosting the level of the low band (by shifting it more
toward the plus side) makes the bass more prominent. This
produces a heavier, more impressive sound. Lowering the
level of the low band (by shifting it more toward the minus
side) cuts the bass. This makes narration phrases and the like
easier to hear.
6. Turn the SELECT dial to make the setting for Fade In
(time: 00.5 sec to 59.9 sec), then press the dial.
*
You can make the setting for Fade Out only when you have
selected Line Thru “ON.”
7. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “No,” then press the ENTER button.
Boosting the level of the high band (by shifting it more
toward the plus side) makes the treble more prominent and
improves drop-out. Boosting it too much imparts a sharp
feel. Lowering the level of the high band (by shifting it more
toward the minus side) cuts the treble and produces a milder
sound. Lowering it too much imparts a muffled or murky
feel.
8. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
When you’re finished making the setting, the display returns
to the setting item selection screen.
Procedure for Making the Equalizer Settings
9. Press the MODE button.
1. Press the MODE button.
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
The MODE indicator lights up.
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Other Useful Functions During Phrase Playback
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “9.3 Equalizer,” then
Keeping the Output Volume
Unchanged (Output Volume
Thru)
press the dial.
fig.20-g03e
This deactivates the OUTPUT VOLUME knob and keeps the
3. Turn the SELECT dial to set Switch to “ON,” then press
output volume level unchanged to prevent accidental
operation.
the dial.
*
The OUTPUT VOLUME knob can still be used to adjust the
headphones volume and MONO OUT (Control Input/Output
Terminals) even when Volume Thru is set to “ON.”
4. Turn the SELECT dial to set the Low Freq (to 200 or 400
Hz), then press the dial.
5. Turn the SELECT dial to set the Low Gain (at a value
OFF: The Output Volume control is effective.
from -12 dB to +12 dB), then press the dial.
ON: The Output Volume control is deactivated.
6. Turn the SELECT dial to set High Freq (to 3 or 6 kHz),
then press the dial.
When Volume Thru is set to “ON,” the volume is fixed at the
level obtained when the control is centered (that is, when
positioned at 12 o’clock).
7. Turn the SELECT dial to set the High Gain (at a value
from -12 dB to +12 dB), then press the dial.
8. If distortion is a problem, turn the SELECT dial to make
the setting for Attenuation (-12 dB to 0 dB), then press the
dial.
Procedure for Making the Output Volume Thru
Setting
1. Press the MODE button.
The MODE indicator lights up.
You can play back the selected phrase by pressing the PLAY
button. This makes it possible to make the setting while
monitoring the actual sound quality.
2. Use the SELECT dial to choose “9.4 Output Vol. Thru,”
then press the dial.
3. Turn the SELECT dial to choose Volume Thru (OFF or
9. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ON), then press the dial.
ENTER button to enable the settings.
fig.20-g04e
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
When you’re finished making the setting, the display returns
to the setting item selection screen.
4. When the prompt appears on the screen, press the
ENTER button to enable the settings.
10.Press the MODE button.
To quit without making the settings, use the SELECT dial to
choose “NO,” then press the ENTER button.
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
When you’re finished making the setting, the display returns
to the setting item selection screen.
*
While making the settings, you can go back to the previous
entry position (highlighted) by using the PAUSE(BACK)
button.
5. Press the MODE button.
This ends the setting process and returns you to the usual
screen.
*
Pressing the MODE button while making the setting displays
a prompt asking you whether you want to quit making the
setting. Note that choosing “YES” and pressing the ENTER
button returns you to the usual screen, discarding any
settings made up to that point.
*
Pressing the MODE button while making the setting displays
a prompt asking you whether you want to quit making the
setting. Note that choosing “YES” and pressing the ENTER
button returns you to the usual screen, discarding any
settings made up to that point.
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
About recording
Can’t record a connected device
Has the “Delay Time” been set for the phrase?
Try playing back the phrase by pressing the AR-3000R’s
PLAY button (manual operation). If the start of playback is
delayed, check the AR-3000R to confirm whether or not the
delay time has been set.
Has the selection of the recording connector (LINE-IN,
LINE+MIC-IN, DIGITAL-IN, or MIDI-IN) been made
correctly?
Make sure the device connected to the connector matches the
selected recording connector.
→“Delay Time” (p. 55)
→ “Selecting the Recording Connector” (p. 43)
If the playback is correct when you press the AR-3000R’s
PLAY button, check the control signals being sent from the
external control device, connections and so on once more.
Recording does not start
Is the trigger recording setting set to LOW, MID, or HIGH?
In trigger recording, recording starts automatically when the
audio input is of a higher level than the trigger level (lever
for starting recording).
Control Input Playback (Direct/Program/
Binary) does not work as intended
Select the correct type of control input (Direct, Program, or Binary).
You cannot achieve control input playback merely by connecting a
device to the port. Be sure to set the control input mode and match
the method used for connecting to the connectors.
If you are not conducting trigger recording, set it to “OFF.”
→ “Trigger Recording Setting” (p. 48)
About playback
Phrases are not played back correctly
as intended
Has the card been formatted on a computer?
Be sure to format cards on an AR series device.
Phrases are assigned to Ports 1 to 16 by means of settings
made on the AR-3000R.
When a card is formatted, the assignments are Port No. 1–
phrase A0001, Port No. 2–phrase A0002,..., Port No. 16–
phrase A0016.
Phrases are not played back (PAUSE indicator
lit in orange).
Is the MTC “Sync Source” set to “MTC?”
When not synchronizing playback with MTC and using the
AR-3000R as a slave, set “Sync Source” on the AR-3000R to
“INTERNAL.”
→ “Assigning Phrases to the Ports” (p. 88)
Phrases in Direct Playback do not stop
playing.
Check the phrase settings and make sure that “Repeat Play”
is not set to “ON.”
Pattern phrases and song phrases are not
played back as intended
→ “Repeat Play” (p. 57)
When creating a pattern phrase or song phrase, you can
containing the constituent phrases is not inserted, playback
will not occur in the normal fashion. (If a constituent phrase
is not present, the unit seeks and plays back the next phrase.)
Make sure the phrases assigned during creation exist on the
cards.
In Program Playback, phrases cannot be
selected as intended.
The assignments of phrases in the Program Playback
sequence are made with settings on the unit.
When a card is formatted, the assignments are No. 1–phrase
A0001, No. 2–phrase A0002,..., No. 100–phrase A0100.
→ “Registering Phrases” (p. 92)
→“Pattern phrase” (p. 62)
Dual Mono playback does not work as
intended.
→“Song phrase” (p. 65)
In the system settings, is “Dual Mono Mode” set to “OFF
(STEREO 1ch)?”
When you are using Dual Mono mode, be sure to set this to
“ON (MONO 2ch).”
Also, Dual Mono mode playback is subject to a wide variety
of conditions.
Check these carefully when using. For detailed information
about the conditions, refer to “What Is Dual Mono Mode?”
(p. 120).
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
The RS-232C port connection does not work as
intended.
MIDI phrases are not played back
• Is “OUT” selected for MIDI output (MIDI OUT or
THRU)?
In the RS-232C settings, do you have the correct “Baud Rate”
selected?
OUT: This sends out MIDI information from the AR-
3000R. Select this when you want to play back MIDI
phrases or send Exclusive (SysEx) messages.
THRU: This takes MIDI information from MIDI IN and
sends it out unchanged. MIDI information from the AR-
3000R is not sent.
When you are using the RS-232C port, select a value that
matches that of the equipment you are using.
In addition, check the device connections for the RS-232C
connector.
→ “Baud Rate Setting” (p. 119)
• Is the MIDI Receive channel set to “OFF?”
The AR-LINK function does not work as
intended
→ “MIDI Receive Channel (MIDI Channel) Settings” (p. 108)
In the AR-LINK settings, is “AR-LINK Mode” set to “OFF?”
When using AR-LINK, set this to “MASTER” or “SLAVE” to
match your usage conditions. In addition, check the device
connections (OUT, IN) for the AR-LINK connector.
Check the AR-3000R to confirm that the AR-LINK device ID
settings are correct.
About MIDI Control Playback
Phrases cannot be played back as intended in
MIDI Control Playback
The assignments of phrases to the note numbers for Program
Change 1 are made with settings on the unit. When a card is
formatted, the assignments are Program Change 1, C-1:
A0001 through G9: A0128. Also, you can assign 128 phrases
of your choosing to Program Change 1, but please be aware
that the phrase assignments to other program changes
cannot be changed (see below).
Cannot make AR-LINK settings
Is “Dual Mono Mode” set to “On” (Dual Mono)?
When using AR-LINK, be sure to set Dual Mono Mode to
Off.
*
*
*
The 1,000 phrases on card A are assigned to Program Changes
21 through 30, and the phrase assignments cannot be changed.
About playback and recording of MIDI
phrases
MIDI phrases cannot be recorded correctly
The 1,000 phrases on card B are assigned to Program Changes
71 through 80, and the phrase assignments cannot be changed.
Some MIDI sequencers output MIDI sound generator setup
messages (tone settings for each part, volume information,
effects data, and so on) when a song is selected, and this may
prevent MIDI messages from being recorded correctly when
recording with the AR-3000R begins. In such instances, start
recording with the AR-3000R first, then after this select and
play back the song from the MIDI sequencer.
For compatibility with the AR-2000 format, 500 phrases on
card A and 500 phrases on card B are assigned to Program
Changes 2 through 6 and 7 through 11, and the phrase
assignments cannot be changed.
*
By transmitting program change 128, you can then send a
Note On message for a note number to interrupt a currently
playing phrase.
MIDI data cannot be recorded
→“Assignment of Phrases to Note Numbers (MIDI Note
Is “MIDI-IN” selected as the recording connector?
When you’re recording MIDI data, choose “MIDI-IN” as the
recording connector.
Map)” (p. 107)
→ “Recording and Playing Back MIDI Data (MIDI Phrases)”–
”Selecting the Recording Connector” (p. 83)
The displayed tempo for a MIDI phrase
remains at 120.
The initial tempo of the AR-3000R is 120, so even if you
record MIDI data having variable tempo to a MIDI phrase,
tempo information is not recorded.
This means that the displayed tempo does not change during
playback of MIDI phrases, but this is not a defect.
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Operation cannot be synchronized
Sound input to the Mic jack is not output from
the audio output jacks.
• Is the MIDI output (MIDI OUT or THRU) selected
correctly?
Sound input to the Mic jack is output from the audio output
jacks only during recording or recording standby (REC-In:
LINE+MIC-IN).
OUT: This sends out MIDI information from the AR-
3000R. Select this when you want to play back MIDI
phrases or send Exclusive (SysEx) messages.
THRU: This takes MIDI information from MIDI IN and
sends it out unchanged.
Please be aware that output at times other than recording or
recording standby (REC-In: LINE+MIC-IN) is not possible.
MIDI information from the AR-3000R is not sent.
• Are the MTC “Sync Source” and “Sync Out” set
correctly?
Make the correct settings to match the circumstances,
according to whether the AR-3000R is the master or the
slave.
• If using MTC, are both devices set to the same MTC
type?
→“Selecting the MTC Type (30/29N/29D/25/24)” (p. 115)
• Check the AR-3000R to confirm that the MIDI device ID
settings are correct.
→ “MIDI device ID settings” (p. 110).
Other Effects
No sound
• Reconfirm that the power to the AR-3000R or connected
device is on.
• Reconfirm that the volume control on the AR-3000R or
connected device is turned up.
• Reconfirm that there are no shorts in any connector
cables.
The volume level of the instrument connected
to LINE IN is too low.
926b
Could you be using a connection cable that contains a
resistor?
Use a connection cable that does not contain a resistor.
There is a scraping sound coming from the AR-
3000R
In situations such as when control signals are input
continuously, the movement of the internal relays may make
a scraping sound, but this does not indicate any malfunction.
To prevent overuse and failure of the relay, you may also
switch to Repeat Playback in order to have the relay move
only once.
→ “Repeat Play” (p. 57)
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error messages
If there has been a mistake in operation, or if the AR-3000R is
unable to continue processing as you directed, an error
message will appear in the display. Note the message that
appears, and take the appropriate action.
Display:
Write-protected
Cannot write card
Situation:
Action:
The card’s write-protect switch is on.
Refer to the owner’s manual for the CF card
and switch off the write-protect switch.
Regarding Cards
Display:
Cannot change to
AR-2000 card.
Display:
No card inserted.
Insert a card.
Situation:
Because the card is in AR-2000 format, setting
changes and the like cannot be written to the
card.
Situation:
Action:
No card is inserted into either of the card slots.
Insert a card.
Display:
Incorrect format.
Format card.
Action:
Convert the card to AR-3000 format, or use
another card that is in AR-3000 format.
Display:
Battery low.
Situation:
The CF card is not formatted for use with the
AR-3000R.
Replace battery.
Action:
Format the CF card.
Situation:
Action:
The voltage of the card’s battery has dropped.
Replace the battery for the card.
Display:
Card damaged.
Format card.
Playback Related
Situation:
Action:
It is possible that the data in the CF card or the
CF card itself has been damaged.
Display:
Cannot play back.
Format the CF card. If formatting is not
possible, or if the same message appears after
the card has been formatted, it may be that the
CF card is malfunctioning. Use a different CF
card.
Check phrase.
Situation:
Action:
Either the phrase data is damaged, or the AR-
3000R is not able to handle the phrase.
Check the phrase for which the message was
displayed.
Display:
Card full.
Display:
No corresponding
phrase.
Delete phrases.
Situation:
Action:
Data cannot be stored on the card because
there is no free space.
Situation:
Action:
There is no phrase corresponding to the
specified phrase.
Increase the amount of free space on the card,
such as by deleting unneeded phrases.
Select a saved phrase or record a new phrase.
Display:
Unsupported card.
Change cards.
Recording Related
Display:
No signal from
Situation:
This memory card cannot be used by the AR-
3000R.
Digital In jack.
Situation:
Action:
There is no signal input from the Digital In
jack.
Action:
Use an AR-3000R CF card
Display:
Card protected.
Write Failure.
Send signals from the digitally connected
equipment.
Situation:
Action:
Card protect is set to ON, so data cannot be
written to the card.
Display:
Card access error.
Change conditions
Set card protect to OFF.
Situation:
Action:
Data was not written to or read from the card
in time.
Change the RDAC-Grade, RDAC-Mode, or
other recording conditions to reduce the
amount of data.
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error messages
is set.
Editing
Display:
Display:
Display:
Display:
Unconvertible
Display:
Cannot set for
pattern phrase(s)
selected phrase.
Cannot convert,
song phrase(s).
Situation:
Action:
A setting item does not correspond to the
selected phrase.
Reselect a phrase for which the setting can be
made, or record a new phrase.
Phr. after No.501
Cannot convert.
Phrase(s) stored
after No. 501.
MIDI Related
Display:
Buffer overflow
Modify trans.
Regarding AR-LINK
Situation:
Action:
More MIDI data was received in a short time
than the AR-3000R was able to process.
Display:
PhraseTypesDiffer
Can’t sync play
Change the way in which MIDI data is being
transmitted.
Situation:
The RDAC-Grades, RDAC-Modes, or
recording types of the phrases being played
back on the master and on the slave are
different.
Display:
MIDI Out at THRU
Nothing sent.
Action:
Make sure the phrases being played back on
the master and the slave have the same RDAC-
Grade, RDAC-Mode, and recording type.
Situation:
Because MIDI output is set to THRU, MIDI
data cannot be sent.
Action:
Set MIDI output to OUT.
Display:
Phrase not found.
Can’t sync playbk
Display:
No Active Sense
Recording stopped
Situation:
Because the phrase specified by AR-LINK does
not exist, synchronized playback is not
possible.
Situation:
Action:
MIDI Active Sense was interrupted.
Check the status of the transmitter and the
MIDI cable connections.
Action:
Specify a phrase that exists on the slave side.
Display:
MIDI checksum
Display:
More than one
error.
AR-LINK master.
Situation:
Action:
Checksum error found in received MIDI data.
Situation:
No more than one AR-LINK master may exist
on a single network.
Check the transmission status and the MIDI
data.
Action:
Set to “Slave.”
Display:
AR-LINK master.
Can’t conn. to IN
System Related
Display:
Unit overheated.
Situation:
Action:
On the device set as the AR-LINK master, IN
cannot be used.
Let heat escape.
Situation:
Action:
The AR-3000R gets hot.
Do not connect to AR-LINK IN on the device
set as “Master.”
Ventilate well to avoid overheating, and keep
the unit cool.
Regarding Card Conversion
*
Refer to the Card Conversion List (p. 80).
Display:
Display:
Display:
Card conv. error
Not enough space
Unconvertible
record setting(s)
Playback point
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cards
Card-specific Audio Recording Time Chart
The following table shows recording times available for cards formatted for the AR-3000R.
*
*
Recording times listed are for mono recording. Recording times are halved when data is recorded in stereo.
These times are for when 1 phrase is recorded continuously, and are provided for your reference when recording. The recording time will
depend on the combination of the grade settings of each phrase recorded in each memory card.
RDAC-Mode
128 MB
H-LINEAR LINEAR MODE3 MODE2* MODE1
RDAC- S-HIGH
14:48
16:06
22:12
32:13
22:12
59:14
59:14 01:28:51
1:04:27 1:36:41
1:28:51 2:13:17
2:08:54 3:13:22
2:57:43 4:26:35
5:55:27 8:53:11
Grade
HIGH
24:10 1:04:27
33:19 1:28:51
48:20 2:08:54
STANDARD
LONG1
LONG2
44:25 1:06:38 2:57:43
1:28:51 2:13:17 5:55:27
ANNOUNCE
RDAC-Mode
H-LINEAR LINEAR MODE3 MODE2* MODE1
512 MB
RDAC- S-HIGH
59:16 1:28:55 3:57:07
1:04:29 1:36:44 4:17:59
1:28:55 2:13:22 5:55:40
2:08:59 3:13:29 8:35:58
3:57:07 5:55:40
4:17:59 6:26:58
5:55:40 8:53:31
8:35:58 12:53:57
Grade
HIGH
STANDARD
LONG1
LONG2
2:57:50 4:26:45 11:51:21 11:51:21 17:47:02
5:55:40 8:53:31 23:42:43 23:42:43 35:34:05
ANNOUNCE
RDAC-Mode
H-LINEAR LINEAR MODE3 MODE2* MODE1
1 GB
RDAC- S-HIGH
1:58:31 2:57:47 7:54:06
2:08:57 3:13:26 8:35:49
7:54:06 11:51:09
8:35:49 12:53:44
Grade
HIGH
STANDARD
LONG1
2:57:47 4:26:41 11:51:09 11:51:09 17:46:44
4:17:54 6:26:52 17:11:39 17:11:39 25:47:28
5:55:34 8:53:22 23:42:18 23:42:18 35:33:28
11:51:09 17:46:44 47:24:37 47:24:37 71:06:56
LONG2
ANNOUNCE
*
Minimum recording times are listed only for MODE2. Depending on conditions, you may be able to attain recording times longer than
listed here.
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cards
Control input settings
Settings When a Card Is
Formatted
When a card is formatted, the values of various settings will
be as shown below.
●5.1 Control Input Mode: DIRECT PLAY
●5.2 Direct Play: NORMAL
• Phrase assignment
Port No.
Phrase
1
2
A0001 or B0001
A0002 or B0002
A0003 or B0003
A0004 or B0004
A0005 or B0005
A0006 or B0006
A0007 or B0007
A0008 or B0008
A0009 or B0009
A0010 or B0010
A0011 or B0011
A0012 or B0012
A0013 or B0013
A0014 or B0014
A0015 or B0015
A0016 or B0016
Recording settings
●REC-IN: LINE-IN
3
●RDAC-Grade: STANDARD
●RDAC-Mode: MODE3
●REC Type: STEREO
●Trig Level: OFF
4
5
6
7
●MIDI Time Base: 192
8
Phrase messages
9
●1.1 Playback Volume: 100 %
●1.2 Delay Time: 00s00f
●1.3 Playback Point: MANUAL
Start: 00h00m00s00f0sf
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
End: The realtime of the phrase
●1.4 Repeat Play: OFF
●1.5 Loop Play: OFF
●1.6 Fade
*
A and B are determined by the slot in which the card is
inserted when formatting.
• Fade In: OFF
• Fade Out: OFF
●5.3 Program Play
●1.7 Control Out: OFF
• Programs 1 played back in order
●1.8 MIDI Tempo: 120
No.1:
Phrase A0001 or B0001
↓
●1.9 Phrase Name: AR-3000 1 (Card Name + Phrase No.)
Card editing
No.100:
Phrase A0100 or B0100
●4.5 Card Protect: OFF
• Programs 2 through 5 played back in order
●4.6 Card Name: AR-3000
No.1:
Phrase -----
↓
No.100:
Phrase -----
*
A and B are determined by the slot in which the card is
inserted when formatting.
●5.4 Binary Play
• Level: ON
• Edge: OFF
●5.5 Binary Rec
• Phrase Select: BINARY1
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cards
●9.3 Equalizer
MIDI Settings
• Switch: OFF
●6.1 MIDI Output (OUT or THRU):OUT
●6.2 MIDI Note Map
• Low Freq: 200 Hz
• Low Gain: 0 dB
• Hi Freq: 6 kHz
• Hi Gain: 0 dB
• Program Change 1
C-1:
PhraseA0001 or B0001
↓
G9:
PhraseA0128 or B0128
• Attenuation: 0dB
●9.4 Output Vol. Thru: OFF
●9.5 Busy Out
*
A and B are determined by the slot in which the card is
inserted when formatting.
●6.3 MIDI Note Out: OFF
●6.4 MIDI Channel: OFF
●6.5 MIDI Note Trigger: TRIGGER
●6.6 MIDI Rx Message
• Note On Velocity: OFF
• Panpot: OFF
• Delay Time: ON
• Phrase Play: ON
• Repeat Int: ON
●9.6 Display Sleep: OFF
Recorded Phrase Data
When a piece of Phrase data recorded by the AR-3000R, the
settings of data on the card will be as follows.
• Expression: OFF
●6.7 MIDI Device ID: 1
●6.8 MMC Mode: OFF
●6.9 MTC
Phrase Settings
• Sync Source: INTERNAL
• Sync Out: OFF
Playback Volume:100%
Delay Time: 00s00f
Playback Point:
• MTC Type: 30
• MTC Error Level: 5
• Start: 00h00m00s00f0sf
• End: The realtime of the phrase
Repeat Play: OFF
Loop Play: OFF
Fade:
RS-232C Settings
●7.1 Baud Rate: 9600 bps
AR-LINK Settings
●8.1 AR-LINK Mode: OFF
• Fade In: OFF
System Settings
• Fade Out: OFF
●9.1 Dual Mono Mode: OFF(STEREO 1ch)
●9.2 Line Thru
Control Out: OFF
MIDI Tempo: 120
• Line Thru: ON
Phrase Name:AR-3000 1
(AR-3000 + Phrase No.)
• Thru Volume: 0 %
• Fade Out: 0.5 s
• Fade In: 0.5 s
136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Terminals
Rated output level: +4 dBu
Specifications of the Control
Input/Output Terminals
Output Impedance: 500 ohm
Recommended Load Impedance: 10 k-ohms or greater
fig.21-02e
*
The control I/O connector cannot be used to switch the power
to the AR unit on or off.
1
*
The output levels may change for stereo and mono audio
phrases.
When making connections to the ports, be careful not to lose
the removed screws. Place the screws out of the reach of
small children. If a screw is accidentally swallowed,
immediately consult a physician.
1
2
3
1. Control Input
Trigger Signal Format: On, Off (Open, Close), Pulse width:
20 msec or more
RS-232C Connector
Specifications
Contact capacity: DC 24 V, 0.1 A or more
Input: Photocoupler
Transmission method: Start-Stop synchronous system
(Asynchronous)Duplex data transmission
Baud rate: 4800 /9600/19200/38400 bps
Parity: none
Pins used for control input:
• Direct playback: 1–16, STOP, COM
• Program playback: START, STOP, INC, DEC,
EXCHANGE, COM
Data length: 8 bit
• Binary playback: 1–10, 11, START, STOP, COM
• Control-port recording : 1–10, 11, 13, 14, COM
Stop bit length: 1 bit
Code set: ASCII
*
Time from make-contact onset until playback starts is
approximately 40 ms (typ.). However, please be aware that this
may vary slightly depending on card type.
*
The setting “38400” bps is for compatibility with legacy
models (AR-3000/2000). However, it is a value for the
communication speed that is not defined by the RS-232C
standards.
*
*
During binary playback, complete input specifying binary
signals within 50 ms.
fig.21-03e
The two common (COM) connectors are connected internally,
so you can achieve operation by making the connection to
either one. In cases such as when you are connecting the
control connectors of a number of AR units with a single
make-contact point, connect one COM connector on each AR
unit to each other. However, do not intermix this unit with
other AR series devices. Doing so may result in unstable
operation.
Pin No. Signal Name
Pin Connection
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
NC
RXD
TXD
DTR
GND
DSR
RTS
CTS
NC
1
5
6
9
2. Control Output
AR-3000R
1 : NC
Computer
Signal system: No-voltage make-contact
Contact capacity: DC 30 V, 5 A
1 : DCD
2 : RXD
3 : TXD
4 : DTR
5 : GND
6 : DSR
7 : RTS
8 : CTS
9 : RI
2 : RXD
3 : TXD
4 : DTR
5 : GND
6 : DSR
7 : RTS
8 : CTS
9 : NC
Connectors used with control output:
• Busy Out: BUSY OUT
• Control Out: CONT OUT, make-contact time: 1 second
3. Audio Output Ports (MONO OUT)
MONO OUT is an audio output (mono, unbalanced) ports.
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Terminals
In addition to the owner’s manual, “RS-232C Reference
Notes” are available for purchase as reference materials that
cover RS-232C connector control. The PDF file can be
downloaded free of charge from the following URL.
AR-LINK Connectors
Specifications
fig.arcon
8 7 6
● The RS-232C Reference Notes cover the following topics:
• Setup
• Overviews, detailed descriptions, and lists of commands
• Examples of usage algorithms
5 4 3
2 1
http://www.rssamerica.com/
AR-LINK IN
AR-LINK OUT
Signal Name
CMD+
CMD-
TRG+
GND
Pin No. Signal Name
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CMD-
CMD+
TRG-
GND
TRG+
CLK-
NC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TRG-
CLK+
NC
CLK-
CLK+
Use an ARC-15 cable (sold separately) to connect to the AR-
LINK connectors.
The cable specifications are as shown below.
fig.arcab
mini DIN, 8-pin, male
6 7 8
mini DIN, 8-pin, male
6 7 8
3 4 5
1 2
3 4 5
1 2
mini DIN, 8-pin, male
mini DIN, 8-pin, male
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Implementation
Model: AR-3000R (Audio Recorder)
● Program Change
Date: May.5,2006
Version: 1.00
Status
Second
CnH
ppH
n = MIDI Channel No.
pp = Program number
: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
1. Receive data (Media Player Section)
■Channel Voice Message
● Note Off
: 00H - 05H (prog.1 - prog.6)
: 06H - 0AH (prog.7 - prog.11)
: 14H - 1DH (prog.21 - prog.11)
: 46H - 4FHH (prog.71- prog.80)
: 7FH (prog.128)
Status
Second
Third
8nH
kkH
vvH
*
*
This switches the MIDI note map used for the phrase assignments.
9nH
kkH
00H
The change goes into effect with the first new Note On after the Program Change is
received. This has no effect on phrases being played before the Program Change is
received.
n = MIDI Channel No. :
kk = Note No. :
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
00H - 7FH (1 - 127)
vv = Velocity :
*
Data is not received if the MIDI Receive channel setting is OFF. When set to 1-16, data is
received only on the selected channel. When set to ALL, data is received on all channels.
*
This stops playback of the phrase for the corresponding note number. (For more on the
corresponding phrases, refer to the Note On parameter.)
*
*
*
This is ignored when “Trigger” is selected for MIDI Trigger Mode.
The Note Off Velocity value is ignored.
■ System Common Message
● Quarter Frame Messages
Data is not received if the MIDI Receive channel setting is OFF. When set to 1-16, data is
received only on the selected channel. When set to ALL, data is received on all channels.
*
Data is received when Sync Source is set to “MTC.” When the Quarter Frame message is
received, operation proceeds with the start of the song synchronized to
“00h00m00s00f00” with the “Delay Time” added.
● Note On
Status
Second
kkH
Third
vvH
9nH
*
*
This acts upon the currently selected audio phrase.
n = MIDI Channel No.
kk = Note No.
: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
: 01H - 7FH (1 - 127)
MIDI phrases and pattern phrases are ignored when Dual Mono mode is selected.
vv = Velocity
Status
F1H
Second
*
*
This plays back the phrase for the corresponding note number.
With Program Change (normally turning the power on), all note numbers (128
mmH (= 0nnndddd)
1
nnn = Message type: 0 = Frame count LS nibble
1 = Frame count MS nibble
numbers) are received. Corresponding phrase numbers may be selected freely.
With Program Changes 21-30, only Note Numbers 00H-63H (0-99) are received. The
phrase numbers correspond to 1-1000 on Card A. Phrase assignments cannot be
changed.
*
*
*
2 = Seconds count LS nibble
3 = Seconds count MS nibble
4 = Minutes count LS nibble
With Program Changes 71 through 80, only Note Numbers 00H through 63H (0 through
99) are received. The phrase numbers correspond to 1 through 1,000 on Card B. Phrase
assignments cannot be changed.
5 = Minutes count MS nibble
6 = Hours count LS nibble
7 = Hours count MS nibble
With Program Changes 2-6 and 7-11, only Note Numbers 00H-63H (0-99) are received.
The phrase numbers correspond to 1-500 on Card A and 1-500 on Card B respectively.
Phrase assignments (AR-2000 compatible) cannot be changed.
With Program 128, playback of the phrase in progress is stopped, regardless of the note
number.
dddd = 4 bit nibble data : 0h - FH (0 - 15)
Bit Field is assigned as follws.
Frame Count
Seconds Count
Minutes Count
Hours Count
xxxyyyyy
*
*
xxx Reserved (000)
yyyyy Frame No.(0-29)
xxyyyyyy
Data is not received if the MIDI Receive channel setting is “OFF.” When set to 1-16, data
is received only on the selected channel. When set to ALL, data is received on all
channels.
xx Reserved (00)
yyyyyy Seconds (0-59)
xxyyyyyy
*
*
*
The Note On Velocity value changes the playback master volume.
The Note On Velocity value is ignored in Dual Mono mode and MIDI playback.
The Note On Velocity value is ignored when Note On Velocity is set to “Off.”
xx Reserved (00)
yyyyyy Minutes (0-59)
xyyzzzzz
● Control Change
❍ Panpot (Controller number 10)
x Reserved (0)
yy Time Code type
0 = 24 Frames / Sec
1 = 25 Frames / Sec
2 = 30 Frames / Sec (Drop Frame)
3 = 30 Frames / Sec (Non Drop Frame
zzzzz Hours (0-23)
Status
BnH
Second
OAH
Third
vvH
n = MIDI Channel No.
vv = Panpot
: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
(0-64-127)
default value = 40H(64)
*
*
*
*
This is adjustable in 127 steps, with 0 being full left, 64 center, and 127 full right.
When Panpot is off, this is not received.
■ System Exclusive Message
Status
Data Bytes
Status
F7H
When MIDI playback is conducted in Dual Mono mode, this is not received.
Data is not received if the MIDI Receive channel setting is “OFF.” When set to 1-16, data
is received only on the selected channel. When set to ALL, data is received on all
channels.
F0H
iiH, ddH,.., eeH
FOH
: System Exclusive Message status
iiH ID Number
: an ID number (manufacturer ID) to indicate the manufacturer whose
Exclusive message this is. Roland’s manufacturer ID is 41H.
ID numbers 7EH and 7FH are extensions of the MIDI standaerd;
Universal Non-Real time Messages (7EH) and Universal Real time
Messages (7FH).
❍ Expression (Controller number 11)
Status
BnH
Second
0BH
Third
vvH
: :
n = MIDI Channel No.
vv = Expression
: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
default value = 7FH (127)
dd,.., ee = Data
F7H
: 00H-7FH (0-127)
:EOX (End of Exclusive Message)
*
*
*
*
This changes the volume level during playback of a phrase.
When Expression is off, this is not received.
The system Exclusive Messages recived by the AR-3000R are; Data Set (DT1).
Regarding the Data Set (DT1), please refer to “exclusive Communication”.
When MIDI playback is conducted in Dual Mono mode, this is not received.
Data is not received if the MIDI Receive channel setting is “OFF.” When set to 1-16, data
is received only on the selected channel. When set to ALL, data is received on all
channels.
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Implementation
● MIDI Time Code
❍ Full Messages
*
Playback is started immediately when this command is received if the device ID
matches, or if 7FH is received.
*
Data is received when Sync Source is set to “MTC.” When the Quarter Frame message is
received, operation proceeds with the start of the song synchronized to
“00h00m00s00f00” with the “Delay Time” added.
❍ RECORD STROBE (MCS)
Status
F0H
Byte
F0H
7FH
dev
Data Bytes
Status
F7H
*
*
*
This acts upon the currently selected audio phrase.
7FH, dev, 06H, 06H
Description
MIDI phrases and pattern phrases are ignored when Dual Mono mode is selected.
Use the full message for specufyubg tge tune (also for fast-forwarding and rewinding).
Status of Exclusive Message
Status
F0H
Data Bytes
Status
F7H
Universal System Exclusive Message Real time Header
device ID (or 7FH)
7FH, dev, 01H, 01H,
hrH, mnH, scH, frH
06H
06H
F7H
MMC Command Message
RECORD STROBE (MCS)
Byte
F0H
7FH
dev
Description
EOX (End of Exclusive Message)
Status of Exclusive Message
*
Recording of the phrase begins when this command is received if the device ID matches,
Universal System Exclusive Message Real time Header
device ID (or 7FH)
or if 7FH is received.
*
If MIDI signal recording is in effect, this command is ignored (MIDI cannot be recorded
with MMC).
01H
01H
hrH
sub-ID#1 (MIDI Time Cord)
sub-ID#1 (Full Messages)
❍ RECORD EXIT (MCS)
Hours Count
xyyzzzzz
Status
F0H
Byte
F0H
7FH
dev
Data Bytes
Status
F7H
x Reserved (0)
7FH, dev, 06H, 07H
Description
yy Time Code type
0 = 24 Frames / Sec
1 = 25 Frames / Sec
2 = 30 Frames / Sec (Drop Frame)
3 = 30 Frames / Sec (Non Drop Frame
zzzzz Hours (0-23)
xxyyyyyy
Status of Exclusive Message
Universal System Exclusive Message Real time Header
device ID (or 7FH)
06H
06H
F7H
MMC Command Message
RECORD STROBE (MCS)
mnH
scH
frH
Minutes Count
Seconds Count
Frame Count
EOX (End of Exclusive Message)
xx Reserved (00)
*
Recording is stopped immediately when this command is received if the device ID
matches, or if 7FH is received.
yyyyyy Minutes (0-59)
xxyyyyyy
*
If MIDI signal recording is in effect, this command is ignored (MIDI cannot be recorded
with MMC).
xx Reserved (00)
yyyyyy Seconds (0-59)
xxxyyyyy
❍ LOCATE (MCP)
Format 2 - LOCATE [TARGET]
xxx Reserved (000)
yyyyy Frame No.(0-29)
F7H
EOX (End of Exclusive)
Status
F0H
Data Bytes
Status
F7H
7FH, dev, 06H, 44H, 06H,
01H, hrH, mnH, scH, frH, ffH
Description
● MIDI Machine Control (MMC)
Byte
F0H
7FH
dev
06H
44H
06H
01H
hrH
mnH
scH
frH
*
This is Received when the MMC mode is set to “SLAVE.”
Status of Exclusive Message
*
This acts upon the currently selected phrase.
Universal System Exclusive Message Realtime Header
device ID (or 7FH)
❍STOP (MCS)
MMC Command Message
LOCATE(MCP)
Status
F0H
Byte
F0H
7FH
dev
Data Bytes
Status
F7H
7FH, dev, 06H, 01H
Description
Number of Bytes
[TARGET] sub command
Standard time with Sub Frame
Status of Exclusive Message
Universal System Exclusive Message Real time Header
device ID (or 7FH)
06H
01H
F7H
MMC Command Message
STOP (MCS)
ffH
EOX (End of Exclusive Message)
F7H
EOX (End of Exclusive Message)
*
*
If the device ID matches, or if 7FH is received, then when this command is received, the
location of the time code specified in the command data is located.
*
Playback is stopped immediately when this command is received if the device ID
matches, or if 7FH is received.
MIDI phrases and pattern phrases are ignored when Dual Mono mode is selected.
❍ PLAY (MCS)
Status
F0H
Byte
F0H
7FH
dev
Data Bytes
Status
F7H
7FH, dev, 06H, 02H
Description
Status of Exclusive Message
Universal System Exclusive Message Real time Header
device ID (or 7FH)
06H
02H
F7H
MMC Command Message
PLAY (MCS)
EOX (End of Exclusive Message)
*
Playback is started immediately when this command is received if the device ID
matches, or if 7FH is received.
❍ DEFERRED PLAY (MCS)
Status
F0H
Byte
F0H
7FH
dev
Data Bytes
Status
F7H
7FH, dev, 06H, 03H
Description
Status of Exclusive Message
Universal System Exclusive Message Real time Header
device ID (or 7FH)
06H
03H
F7H
MMC Command Message
DEFERRED PLAY (MCS)
EOX (End of Exclusive Message)
140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Implementation
■ System Common Message
● Quarter Frame
2. Transmitted data (Media Player Section)
2.1 Transmitted messages while a phrase
is being played back
*
This is transmitted when Sync Out is set to “MTC.” The time count transmitted is the
time with the start of the song set to “00h00m00s00f00” with the “Delay Time” added.
MIDI phrases and pattern phrases are not transmitted when Dual Mono mode is
selected.
*
The stored MIDI message are transmitted When the MIDI phrase will playback after OUT is
set in the MIDI OUT.
status
F1H
second
mmH (= 0nnndddd)
In this case, AR-3000R is not transmitted MIDI messages which are received.
Regarding the Quarter Frame, please refer to “Receive data (Media Player Section) ~Quarter
Frame~”.
2.2 Transmitted message which are received.
When THRU is set in the MIDI OUT, AR-3000R transmits message which are received.
■ System Exclusive Message
● MIDI Time Cord
❍ Full Message
2.3 Transmitted message which are produced.
When OUT is set in the MIDI OUT, AR-3000R transmits the following produced messages.
■Channel Voice Message
*
This is transmitted when Sync Out is set to “MTC” and the location of the phrase is
moved. The time count transmitted is the time with the start of the song set to
“00h00m00s00f00” and the “Delay Time” added.
● Note Off
*
*
MIDI phrases and pattern phrases are not transmitted when Dual Mono mode is
selected.
Status
Second
kkH
Third
40H
8nH
Device ID = 7FH
n = MIDI Channel No.
kk = Note No.
: 0H -- FH (ch.1--ch.16)
: 00H--7FH (0--127)
Status
F0H
Data Bytes
Status
F7H
*
After the MIDI Phrase is stopped, AR-3000R produces Note off message for received
notes remains on.
7FH, dev, 01H, 01H
hrH, mnH, scH, frH
*
When Note On is sent at the start of an audio performance, the same note number as that
of the Note On is transmitted. For more information about sending notes, refer to the
Note On section below.
Regarding the MIDI Time Cord, please refer to “Receive data (Media Player Section) ~MIDI
Time Cord~”.
● Note ON
● MIDI Machine Control (MMC)
Status
Second
kkH
Third
7FH
*
Data is transmitted when MMC mode is set to “MASTER.”
9nH
❍ STOP (MCS)
n = MIDI Channel No.
kk = Note No.
: 0H--FH (ch.1--ch.16)
: 00H--7FH (0--127)
Status
F0H
Byte
F0H
7FH
dev
Data Bytes
Status
F7H
7FH, dev, 06H, 01H
Description
*
At the start of the audio phrase performance, the note number defined in the MIDI note
map is sent.In this instance, if multiple note numbers are selected in the phrase, only the
lowest note number is transmitted.
Status of System Exclusive Message
Universal System Exclusive Message Real time Header
device ID (7FH)
*
*
There is no transmission when the Note Send setting is set to “OFF”.
Data is not output if the MIDI Receive channel setting is “OFF.” When set to 1-16, data is
transmitted only on the selected channel. When set to ALL, data is transmitted on
Channel 1.
06H
01H
F7H
MMC Command Message
STOP (MCS)
EOX (End of System Exclusive Message)
*
There is no transmission during playback of MIDI phrases.
*
When playing of a phrase is stopped, a STOP message is transmitted.
● Control Change
❍ Hold1 OFF
❍ DEFERRED PLAY (MCS)
Status
F0H
Byte
F0H
7FH
dev
Data Bytes
Status
F7H
Status
BnH
Second
40H
Third
00H
7FH, dev, 06H, 01H
Description
n = MIDI Channel No.
: 0H--FH (ch.1--ch.16)
Status of System Exclusive Message
Universal System Exclusive Message Real time Header
device ID (7FH)
*
*After the MIDI Phrase is stopped, AR-3000R produces Note off message for received
notes remains on.
■ Channel Mode Message
06H
03H
F7H
MMC Command Message
DEFERRED PLAY (MCS)
● All Note Off (Controller No. 1 2 3)
EOX (End of System Exclusive Message)
Status
Second
Third
*
When “START” is pressed, a DEFFERRED PALY message is transmitted.
BnH
7BH
00H
❍ RECORD STROBE (MCS)
n = MIDI channel No.
: 0H--FH (ch.1--ch.16)
Status
F0H
Data Bytes
Status
F7H
*
Transmitted message while a phrase is being played back.
7FH, dev, 06H, 07H
Description
2.4 Recognized message for sync
■ System Realtime Message
● Timing Clock
Byte
F0H Status of System Exclusive Message
7FH
7FH
06H
06H
F7H
Universal System Exclusive Message Real time Header
device ID (7FH)
status
MMC Command Message
F8H
RECORD STROBE (MCS)
*
Transmitted message while a phrase is being played back.
EOX (End of System Exclusive Message)
● Start
*
When recording of a phrase begins, a RECORD STROBE message is transmitted.
status
❍ RECORD EXIT (MCS)
FAH
Status
F0H
Byte
F0H
7FH
dev
Data Bytes
Status
F7H
● Stop
status
7FH, dev, 06H, 07H
Description
Status of System Exclusive Message
Universal System Exclusive Message Real time Header
device ID (7FH)
FCH
06H
07H
F7H
MMC Command Message
RECORD EXIT
EOX (End of System Exclusive Message)
*
When recording of a phrase is stopped, a RECORD EXIT message is transmitted
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Implementation
❍ LOCATE (MCP)
format2 - LOCATE [TARGET]
■ Channel Mode Message
● All Sound Off
Status
F0H
Data Bytes
Status
F7H
Status
Second
Third
00H
7FH, dev, 06H, 44H, 06H
01H, hrH, mnH, scH, frH, ffH
Description
BnH
78H
n = MIDI channel No. : 0H -FH (ch.1 --ch 16)
Byte
F0H
7FH
dev
06H
44H
06H
01H
hrH
mnH
scH
frH
Status of System Exclusive Message
Universal System Exclusive Message Real time Header
device ID (7FH)
● Reset All Controller
Status
Second
Third
00H
BnH
78H
MMC Command Message
LOCATE (MCP)
n = MIDI channel No. : 0H -FH (ch.1 --ch 16)
Number of byte
[TARGET] sub command
Standard time with Sub Frame
● Local On / Off
Status
Second
Third
vvH
BnH
7AH
n = MIDI channel No.
vv = value
: 0H -FH (ch.1 --ch 16)
: 00H, 7FH (OFF, ON)
ffH
F7H
EOX (End of System Exclusive Message)
● MONO
*
*
When the location is moved, a LOCATE message is transmitted.
MIDI phrases and pattern phrases are not transmitted when Dual Mono mode is
selected.
Status
Second
7EH
Third
mmH
BnH
n = MIDI channnel No.
mm = mono number
: 0H -FH (ch.1 --ch 16)
: 00H - 10H (0 - 16)
3. Receive data (MIDI Recorder Section)
3.1 Message memorized during recording
■Channel Voice Message
● Note Off
Status
*
The same processing will be carried out as when All Notes Off is received.
● POLY
Status
Second
7EH
Third
00H
BnH
n = MIDI channel No.
mm = mono number
: 0H -FH (ch.1 --ch 16)
: 00H - FH (0 - 16)
Second
kkH
Third
vvH
8nH
*
The same processing will be carried out as when All Notes Off is received.
9nH
kkH
00H
n = MIDI Channel No.
kk = Note No.
: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
: 00H - 7FH (1 - 127)
■ System Exclusive Message
Status
Data Bytes
Status
F7H
vv = Velocity
F0H
iiH, ddH,.., eeH
FOH
: System Exclusive Message status
● Note On
iiH ID Number
: an ID number (manufacturer ID) to indicate the manufacturer whose
Exclusive message this is. Roland’s manufacturer ID is 41H.
ID numbers 7EH and 7FH are extensions of the MIDI standard;
Universal Non-real time Messages (7EH) and Universal Real time
Messages (7FH).
Status
Second
kkH
Third
vvH
9nH
n = MIDI Channel No.
kk = Note No.
vv = Velocity
: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
: 01H - 7FH (1 - 127)
dd,.., ee = Data
F7H
: 00H-7FH (0-127)
: EOX (End of Exclusive Message)
● Polyphonic Key Pressure
3.2 Message not memorized during
Status
Second
Third
recording
AnH
kkH
vvH
n = MIDI Channel No.
kk = Note No.
: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
■ Channel Mode Message
● All Note Off
vv = value
Status
Second
Third
BnH
78H
00H
●Control Change
n = MIDI channel No.
: 0H -FH (ch.1 --ch 16)
status
Second
Third
vvH
*
Note Off is generated for any note not set to OFF, and this note off is stored.
BnH
kkH
● OMNI OFF
Status
n = MIDI Channel No.
kk = Controller No.
vv = value
: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
Second
78H
Third
00H
BnH
n = MIDI channel No.
: 0H -FH (ch.1 --ch 16)
*
The same processing will be carried out as when All Notes Off is received.
● Program Change
● OMNI ON
Status
Status
Second
Third
vvH
Second
7AH
Third
vvH
CnH
ppH
BnH
n = MIDI Channel No.
pp = Program No.
: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
n = MIDI channel No.
vv = value
: 0H -FH (ch.1 --ch 16)
: 00H, 7FH (OFF, ON)
*
The same processing will be carried out as when All Notes Off is received.
● Channel Pressure
3.3 Recognized message for remote
Status
Second
BnH
kkH
control
n = MIDI Channel No.
vv = value
: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
■System Real time Message
● Start
● Pitch Bend Change
status
Status
Second
F8H
EnH
llH
*
Not received when recording mode is not “Standby”.
n = MIDI Channel No.
: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
● Continue
status
FBH
142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Implementation
*
*
Not received when recording mode is not “Standby”.
■ Address Block Map
An outlined address map of the Exclusive Communication is as follows;
The same processing will be carried out as when Start is received.
● Stop
status
❍ Exclusive Address Table
for recording setting
FCH
Address(H)
SIZE(H)
DATA(H)
Parameter
Description
*
Not received when recording mode is not “record”.
===================================================================
00 00 10
11#
00 00 08
00 - 07
00 - 7f
00 - 05
Phrase Number
Phrase Number
Grade
upper 4bits
lower 7bits
0:ANNOUNCE
1:LONG2
2:LONG1
3:STANDARD
4:HIGH
3.4 Messages received for detecting
trouble in MIDI connection.
■System Realtime message
● Active Sensing
12#
Status
FEH
5:S-HIGH
0:Linear
*
When Active Sensing is received, the unit will begin monitoring the intervals of all
further messages. While monitoring, if the interval between messages exceeds 400 ms,
the same processing will be carried out as when All Sounds Off, All Notes Off and Reset
All Controllers are received, and message interval monitoring will be halted.
13#
00 - 04
R-DAC mode
REC type
1:Mode1
2:Mode2
3:Mode3
4:H-LINEAR
0:MONO
14#
15#
00 - 01
00 - 03
4. Transmit data (MIDI Recorder Section)
1:STEREO
When AR-3000R is in MIDI Recorder mode, MIDI Messages is not transmitted.
REC Trigger Level 0:OFF
1:LOW
2:MID
5. Exclusive Communication
3:HIGH
Exclusive message model IDs that can be used on the AR-3000R are OOH, 00H, and 37H
(AR-3000R). The Device Id can be set to 00H to 1FH.
16#
17#
00 - 03
00 - 01
REC Source
0:LINE-IN
1:LINE+MIC-IN
2:DIGITAL-IN
3:MIDI-IN
0:192
Only received when AR-3000R is in Media Player Section.
● Data Set 1 DT1 (12H)
Byte
F0H
41H
dev
mdl
12H
aaH
:
Description
TimeBase
Status of System Exclusive Message
1:240
Universal System Exclusive Message Real time Header
===================================================================
device ID (dev : 00H--1FH)
Phrase number
A0001-A1000
DATA(H)
Model ID (mdl : 00H, 37H) AR-3000R
00 00 - 07 67
07 68 - 0H 4F
Command ID (DT1)
B0001-B1000
address MSB
*
*
Only received packet data.
:
When reception of this packet is completed, the AR-3000R goes into REC PAUSE mode.
However, if the phrase already exists, the AR-3000R ignores this SysEx message.
ccH
ddH
:
Address LSB
Data
:
(AR-2000 compatible)
Address(H) SIZE(H)
===================================================================
kkH
sum
F7H
Data
DATA(H)
Parameter
Description
Check Sum
EOX (End of System Exclusive Message)
00 00 00
01#
00 00 08
00 - 07
00 - 7f
00 - 04
Phrase Number
Phrase Number
Grade
upper 3bits
lower 7bits
0:ANNOUNCE
1:LONG2
2:LONG1
3:STANDARD
4:HIGH
5.1 Parameter Address Map
02#
This map indicates address,size, data (range), Parameter, Description,and default Value of
parameters which can be transferred using “Data Set1(DT1).”
All the numbers of address, size, Data, and default Value are indicated in 7-bit
03#
00 - 02
R-DAC mode
REC type
0:Linear
Hexadecimal-form.
1:Mode1
(AR-3000R Model ID=00H,37H)
2:Mode2
04#
05#
00 - 01
00 - 03
0:MONO
1:STEREO
REC Trigger Level 0:OFF
1:LOW
2:MID
3:HIGH
06#
07#
00 - 01
00 - 01
REC Source
0:ANALOG-IN
(MIDI REC OFF)
1:MIDI-IN
(MIDI REC ON)
0:192
TimeBase
1:240
===================================================================
Phrase number
A0001 - A0500
DATA(H)
00 00 - 03 73
03 74 - 07 67
B0001 - B0500
*
*
Only received packet data.
When reception of this packet is completed, the AR-3000R goes into REC PAUSE mode.
However, if the phrase already exists, the AR-3000R ignores this SysEx message.
ANALOG-IN for REC Source is set to LINE-IN on the AR-3000R.
*
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Implementation
❍
Exclusive Address Table Recording setting (Replacement Recording)
Address(H) SIZE(H) DATA(H) Parameter Description
===================================================================
❍Exclusive Address Table Phrase Select
Address(H)
SIZE(H)
DATA(H)
Parameter
Description
===================================================================
00 01 10
11#
00 00 08
00 - 07
00 - 7f
00 - 05
Phrase Number
Phrase Number
Grade
upper 4bits
lower 7bits
0:ANNOUNCE
1:LONG2
2:LONG1
3:STANDARD
4:HIGH
01 00 10
11#‘
00 00 02
00 - 07
00 - 7f
Phrase Number
Phrase Number
upper 4bits
lower 7bits
12#
===================================================================
Phrase number
A0001 - A1000
DATA(H)
00 00 - 07 67
07 68 - 0F 4F
B0001 - B1000
*
*
Only received packet data.
5:S-HIGH
0:Linear
When reception of this packet is completed, the AR-3000R changes to the current
(currently displayed) phrase number.
13#
00 - 02
R-DAC mode
REC type
1:Mode1
2:Mode2
(AR-100/2000 compatible)
Address(H) SIZE(H)
===================================================================
3:Mode3
DATA(H)
Parameter
Description
4:H-Linear
0:MONO
14#
15#
00 - 01
00 - 03
01 00 00
01#
00 00 02
00 - 07
00 - 7f
Phrase Number
Phrase Number
upper 3bits
lower 7bits
1:STEREO
REC Trigger Level 0:OFF
===================================================================
1:LOW
2:MID
Phrase number
A0001 - A0500
DATA(H)
00 00 - 03 73
03 74 - 07 67
3:HIGH
B0001 - B0500
16#
17#
00 - 03
00 - 01
REC Source
0:LINE-IN
1:LINE+MIC-IN
2:DIGITAL-IN
3:MIDI-IN
0:192
*
*
Only received packet data.
When reception of this packet is completed, the AR-3000R changes to the current
(currently displayed) phrase number.
TimeBase
❍Exclusive Address Table Recording Settings (Replacement Recording)
Address(H) SIZE(H) DATA(H) Parameter Description
===================================================================
1:240
===================================================================
Phrase number
A0001 - A1000
DATA(H)
01 00 10
11#
12#
00 00 03
00 - 07
00 - 7f
00 - 02
Phrase Number
Phrase Number
REC Source
upper 4bits
00 00 - 07 67
07 68 - 0F 4F
lower 7bits
B0001 - B1000
0:ANALOG-IN
1:LINE+MIC-IN
2:DIGITAL-IN
3:MIDI-IN
*
*
Only received packet data.
When reception of this packet is completed, the AR-3000R goes into REC PAUSE mode.
However, if a phrase has already been saved, the AR-3000R deletes that phrase and goes
into REC PAUSE mode.
===================================================================
(AR-2000 compatible)
Address(H) SIZE(H)
===================================================================
Phrase number
A0001 - A1000
B0001 - B1000
DATA(H)
DATA(H)
Parameter
Description
00 00 - 07 67
07 68 - 0F 4F
00 01 00
01#
00 00 08
00 - 07
00 - 7f
00 - 04
Phrase Number
Phrase Number
Grade
upper 3bits
lower 7bits
0:ANNOUNCE
1:LONG2
2:LONG1
3:STANDARD
4:HIGH
*
*
Only received packet data.
02#
When reception of this packet is completed, the AR-3000R goes into REC PAUSE mode.
However, if a phrase has already been saved, the AR-3000R deletes that phrase and goes
into REC PAUSE mode.
(AR-100/2000 compatible)
Address(H) SIZE(H)
===================================================================
03#
00 - 02
R-DAC mode
REC type
0:Linear
DATA(H)
Parameter
Description
1:Mode1
2:Mode2
01 00 00
01#
02#
00 00 03
00 - 07
00 - 7f
00 - 01
Phrase Number
Phrase Number
REC Source
upper 3bits
04#
05#
00 - 01
00 - 03
0:MONO
lower 7bits
1:STEREO
0:ANALOG-IN
(MIDI REC OFF)
1:MIDI-IN
REC Trigger Level 0:OFF
1:LOW
2:MID
(MIDI REC ON)
3:HIGH
===================================================================
06#
07#
00 - 01
00 - 01
REC Source
0:ANALOG-IN
Phrase number
A0001 - A0500
DATA(H)
(MIDI REC OFF)
1:MIDI-IN
(MIDI REC ON)
0:192
00 00 - 03 73
03 74 - 07 67
B0001 - B0500
*
*
Only received packet data.
TimeBase
When reception of this packet is completed, the AR-3000R goes into REC PAUSE mode.
However, if a phrase has already been saved, the AR-3000R deletes that phrase and goes
into REC PAUSE mode.
1:240
===================================================================
Phrase number
A0001 - A0500
DATA(H)
*
ANALOG-IN for REC Source is set to LINE-IN on the AR-3000R.
00 00 - 03 73
03 74 - 07 67
B0001 - B0500
*
*
Only received packet data.
When reception of this packet is completed, the AR-3000R goes into REC PAUSE mode.
However, if a phrase has already been saved, the AR-3000R deletes that phrase and goes
into REC PAUSE mode.
*
ANALOG-IN for REC Source is set to LINE-IN on the AR-3000R.
144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUDIO RECORDER
Model AR-3000R
Date : May. 5, 2006
Version : 1.00
MIDI Implementation Chart
Media Player Section
Remarks
Transmitted
Recognized
Function ...
*1
Memorized
Basic
Default
All channels
x
Channel
Changed
x
1–16
Default
Message
Altered
x
x
x
x
*2
*2
Mode
****************
*2
Note
Number :
0 –127
****************
x
x
True Voice
Note ON
Note OFF
o
o
x
x
*1
*1
Velocity
After
Touch
Key's
Ch's
o
o
x
x
*1
*1
Pitch Bend
o
x
*1
Panpot
Expression
Messages other than
the above
*2
*2
*1
*1
*1
o
o
o
x
x
x
10
11
0 – 119
Control
Change
Program
Change :
o
x
*2
*4
*1
True #
****************
1–11, 21–30, 71–80
System Exclusive
o
*1
*3
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
: Quarter Frame
: Song Pos
: Song Sel
: Tune
System
Common
o
o
System
Real Time : Commands
: Clock
x
x
*1
: All Sounds OFF
: Reset All Controllers
: Local ON/OFF
: All Notes OFF
: Active Sensing
: System Reset
o
o
x
o
x
x
*1
*1
x
x
x
x
x
x
Aux
Messages
*1
Notes
*1 Transmitted only during MIDI phrase playback
*2 o x is selectable.
*3 Transmitted when Sync Out is at MTC.
*4 Received when Sync Source is at MTC.
Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY
Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO
o : Yes
x : No
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUDIO RECORDER
Model AR-3000R
Date : May. 5, 2006
Version : 1.00
MIDI Implementation Chart
MIDI Recorder Section
Remarks
Transmitted
Recognized
Function ...
Not Basic Channel
Basic
Channel
Default
Changed
x
x
all channels
x
Default
Message
Altered
x
x
x
x
Mode
****************
Note
Number :
x
0 –127
0 –127
True Voice
****************
Note ON
Note OFF
x
x
o
o
Velocity
After
Touch
Key's
Ch's
x
x
o
o
Pitch Bend
x
o
0 –119
x
o
Control
Change
Program
Change :
x
o
True #
****************
0 –127
System Exclusive
x
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
: Quarter Frame
System
Common
: Song Pos
: Song Sel
: Tune
System
Real Time : Commands
: Clock
x
x
x
o
*1
: All Sounds OFF
: Reset All Controllers
: Local ON/OFF
: All Notes OFF
: Active Sensing
: System Reset
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
x
Aux
Messages
*1
o ( 123–127 )
o
x
Notes
Mode messages (123–127) are stored/transmitted after All Note Off processing is
performed.
Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY
Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO
o : Yes
x : No
146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specification
Recording Format
Number of phrases
RDAC (Roland Digital Audio Coding)
Maximum 1000 Phrases (when 1 CF card is used)
Maximum 2000 phrases (when 2 CF cards are use)
RDAC-GRADE (Sampling rate)
Playback method
S-HIGH:
48kHz
44.1kHz
32kHz
22.05kHz
16kHz
8kHz
HIGH:
Manual playback
STANDARD:
LONG1:
Direct playback:
16 phrases, 4 modes(Normal,
First-In, Last-In, Sequence)
100 phrases, 5 program
2000 phrases
Program playback:
Binary playback:
LONG2:
ANNOUNCE:
Computer-controlled playback: 2000 phrases
100 phrases(continuous play)
2000 phrases
2000 phrases
Playback rate Area
S-HIGH:
20Hz–22kHz
MIDI playback:
HIGH:
20Hz–20kHz
20Hz–15kHz
20Hz–10kHz
20Hz–7.5kHz
20Hz–3.7kHz
AR-LINK playback:
STANDARD:
LONG1:
Equalizer
High :
Low :
-12dB – +12dB (3/6kHz, Shelving Type)
-12dB – +12dB (200/400Hz, Shelving Type)
LONG2:
ANNOUNCE:
Residual Noise Level (Input Short, front sense:
middle, rear sense: middle, IHF-A, typ.)
RDAC-Mode (Signal processing method)
H-Linear:
Linear:
24-bit PCM recording
- 80 dBu
16-bit PCM recording
Mode 3:
Mode 2:
2.5 times extended Recording time than Linear
2.5 times more extended Recording time than
Linear.
.
S/N Ratio
BALANCED OUTPUT : 90 dB (IHF-A, Typ)
RS-232C
Mode 1:
4 times more extended Recording time than
Linear.
Transmission method: Start-Stop synchronous system
(Asynchronous)Duplex data
transmission
Recording media
Baud rate:
Parity:
4800 /9600/19200/38400 bps
Memory card (CF card)
none
8 bits
1 bit
*
In order to recording/playback of audio signal and MIDI data,
you will need to purchase one of the CF cards.
Data length:
Stop bit length:
Code set:
Compact Flash card Slot
ASCII
2 Slot (TYPE1)
*
The setting “38400” bps is for compatibility with legacy
models (AR-3000/ 2000). However, it is a value for the
communication speed that is not defined by the RS-232C
standards.
Phrase types
Audio phrases (stereo/mono)
MIDI phrases
Display
160 x 48 dots Graphic LCD (Backlight)
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specification
Controllers
Dimensions
MIC INPUT Volume Knob
LINE INPUT Volume Knob
Card Eject Button
482 (W) x 231.4 (D) x 44 (H) mm
19 (W) x 9-1/8 (D) x 1-3/4 (H) inches
(EIA-1U rack mount type)
PLAY Button
Weight
STOP Button
2.7 kg/6 lbs
PAUSE, BACK Button
EZ SETUP Button
Operating Free-air Temperature Range
0–40 degrees Celsius
MODE Button
32–104 degrees Fahrenheit
ENTER Button
SELECT Dial (Doubles As SELECT Button)
OUTPUT Volume Knob
POWER Switch
Operating Free-air Humidity Range
0–80 % (non-condensing)
Accessories
Indicators
Power Cord
CARD ACCESS Indicator
PLAY Indicator
Rubber Foot x 4
Card Protector x 2 (With 4 Screws)
Owner’s Manual
PAUSE Indicator
EZ SETUP Indicator
MODE Indicator
Options
Network Board (AR-NT1R)
AR-LINK Cable (ARC-15)
Connectors
MIC IN Jack (1/4 inch TRS phone type)
LINE IN Jacks (MONO/L,R, RCA phono type)
*
*
0 dBu=0.775Vrms
In the interest of product improvement, the specifications and/
or appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior
notice.
DIGITAL IN Connector (RCA phono type, Coaxial type, S/P
DIF, EIAJ CP-1201-compliant)
Control I/O Terminal (25 pin Terminal Block with M3 screws)
MIDI Connectors (OUT/THRU, IN, 5-pin DIN type)
RS-232C Connector (9 pin D-sub type)
*
In addition to the owner’s manual, the separate publication
“RS-232C Reference Notes” is also available for those needing
detailed documentation regarding RS-232C connector control.
Please download the PDF-file (free of charge) from the
following URL.
AR-LINK Connectors (OUT, IN, 8-pin mini DIN type)
Audio Output Jacks (1/4 inch TRS phone type, balanced)
Head Phone Jack (Stereo 1/4 inch phone type)
●The RS-232C Reference Notes cover the following topics:
• Setup
Power Supply
• Overviews, detailed descriptions, and lists of commands
• Examples of usage algorithms
AC 117 V, AC 230 V or AC 240 V (50/60Hz)
Power Consumption
11 W (117 V)
http://www.rssamerica.com/
12 W (230, 240 V)
148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specification
Input/Output Standard
fig.spec
Input Standard (Volume: center)
Non Clip
Max Input Level
Input
Impedance
Recommended
Source Impedance
Input
Input Sense
Rated Input Level
1 kohms
or less
MIC Input Jack
Line Input Jack
-55 dBu
-40 dBu
-42 dBu
+2 dBu
2 kohms
20 kohms
(stereo)
2 kohms
or less
-15 dBu
0 dBu
Output Standard (Volume: center)
Non Clip
Max Output Level
Output
Impedance
Recommended
Load Impedance
Output
Rated Output Level
600 ohms
or more
Audio output Jack
+4 dBu
----------
+6 dBu
500 ohms
100 ohms
30 ohms
or more
*1
Headphone Jack
90 mW+90 mW
* 0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms
*1: 100 ohms with both channels loaded
Dimensions
430.1
41.0 3.5
16.2
197.8 231.4
17.4
44.0
1.3
45.3
482.0
* Dimensions are with card inserted and rubber feet (included) attached.
* The power cord is not included.
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A
AR-LINK Connectors ................................................. 138
Attenuation .................................................................. 126
B
Phrase Delete .................................................................. 67
C
Card Delete .................................................................... 76
Card Name ..................................................................... 77
Control Input/Output Terminals ............................. 137
Control Out ............................................................ 59, 104
RDAC .............................................................................. 43
Repeat Play ..................................................................... 57
D
Direct Playback .............................................................. 86
Dual Mono Mode ........................................................ 120
E
Setting Copy ................................................................... 77
Song Phrases .................................................................. 65
Elapsed Time .................................................................. 52
Equalizer ....................................................................... 126
Trigger Recording ......................................................... 48
F
Fade ................................................................................. 58
L
M
MIDI Note Out ............................................................ 109
MIDI Output .................................................................. 84
MIDI Phrases ................................................................. 82
MIDI Receive Channel ................................................ 108
MIDI Time Base ............................................................. 83
MMC ............................................................................. 110
MTC ............................................................................... 112
MTC Error Level ......................................................... 115
150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For EU Countries
For the USA
This product complies with the requirements of EMCD 2004/108/EC and LVD 2006/95/EC.
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
–
–
–
–
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.
This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.
For Canada
NOTICE
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
AVIS
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
(
)
For C.A. US Proposition 65
WARNING
This product contains chemicals known to cause cancer, birth defects and other reproductive harm, including lead.
For EU Countries
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*
0
4
2
3
6
5
6
7
-
0
6
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|